Teltonika Telematics Wiki - User contributions [en]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-04-08T07:45:58Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Task Types */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Device details2.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

 

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown. 

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.

There are 4 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
4. For '''all devices'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create FOTA task3.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Upload 1-Wire authorization list''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Upload 1-Wire devices list to FT devices | Select File |Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function allows to upload 1-Wire devices list from CSV file. This task is available just for FT devices. 
|-
|'''Receive 1-Wire authorization list''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configured 1-Wire devices list from FT devices | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function receives configured 1-Wire devices list. This task is available just for FT devices. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:task by time.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:task by date.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]

 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.

Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Move devices2.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 4 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 4. For '''all devices'''. 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''

A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.
There are 4 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 
4. For '''all devices'''. 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Transfer_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.

 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer2.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).

 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Important information:'''

* '''Daily unlock code limit''' - You can generate a maximum of '''3 unlock codes per unique device''' every 24 hours.
* '''Device volume''' - There is '''no limit''' on the total number of unique devices you can process in a day.
* '''Universal access''' - The unlock tool is available to '''all user roles''' and access is not restricted by specific account permissions.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

Template:FTX Tracking settings

2026-03-31T11:15:52Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Records settings */

==Records settings==
{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| #default =
[[File:FTX records settings.png|right|500 px]]

| ATM700
| ATC700 =
[[File:ATX Records setting.png|right|500 px]]
}}
'''Saving/sending mode'''

This feature will be used to save and send records to the server without time synchronization.

'''Possible options:'''

'''After Position Fix''' - records will be saved and sent only after position fix. Coordinate acquisition time is configured via the "GNSS position fix search timeout" parameter.

'''After Time Sync''' - records will be saved and sent only after time synchronization. “GNSS position fix search timeout” is not used here; therefore, records may lack GNSS location data.

'''Always''' - records will always be saved and sent even if there is no time synchronization. “GNSS position fix search timeout” is not used here; therefore, records may lack GNSS location data.

'''Note''': If the record is without valid coordinates – (there were no GPS fix at the moment of data acquisition) – Longitude, Latitude and Altitude values are sent as per the last valid fix, and Angle, Satellites and Speed will be 0. However, if there is a reboot then it will send zero coordinates.

{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| ATM700
| ATC700 =
'''GNSS position fix search timeout (s)'''

GNSS position fix search timeout in seconds, after timeout periodic and scheduled records are generated without position fix and sleep is allowed.

* This parameter is measured in seconds. Default value is 120 seconds.
* Minimal value = 0 seconds, maximum value = 86400 seconds.
}}

'''Sort by'''

Can be set as either Newest or Oldest. For example, if the Oldest is marked, the device first will send the Oldest information, and if the Newest is marked, the device will send the newest information. Suppose the device had no connection (GSM or GPRS) due to bad coverage or being in an area with no signal, the device continues to save records into internal memory, and once GSM and GPRS are recovered, the device will start sending saved data to the server. In this example, if Oldest is configured - until the newest data is seen on the server, all of the oldest records have to be sent first. If Newest is configured - previous data and track won't be seen until the newest data is sent first. If high priority on I/O parameters or Features is configured device will send the generated records with High Priority first.

'''Server Confirmation Method'''

Defines the device's ability to establish GPRS connection through specific acknowledgement (ACK) type. Can be set as either TCP/IP or AVL.

If '''TCP/IP''' is selected, then server acknowledgement is not needed and the device will accept TCP/IP layer ACK.

If '''AVL''' is selected, then the server must respond with an acknowledgement.

'''Data protocol'''

In ''Data Protocol'' only protocol version ('''[[Codec#Codec 8 Extended|Codec 8 Extended]]''') is available for data sending to the server. 

{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| ATM700
| ATC700 =
== Asset tracking modes ==
[[File:Asset tracking modes.png|right|500 px]]
'''Note:'''This scenario is only available for asset tracking (''ATX'') devices.
Asset tracking modes functionality controls records profiles with conditions on when records are being saved and sent.

=== Basic movement mode ===
In Basic tracking mode, the accelerometer is disabled. The device relies only on periodic wake-ups. Records are generated and sent at a fixed interval. Depending on configured periodic record priority, records can be:
*Sent immediately when generated in High priority case.
*Stored until they are sent in batches in Low priority case.

Record generation and sending uses periodic record configuration parameters. 
Records are generated at a fixed interval, configurable via parameters “'''By time'''” - in Home network (ID 10000) and in Roaming network (ID 10100).

Records are sent at a separate fixed interval, configurable via parameters “'''Send period'''” - in Home network (ID 10005) and in Roaming network (ID 10105).

If the device is configured to send records in Low priority, minimum number of records have to be generated before sending occurs. This value can be configured via parameters “'''Min Saved Records'''” - in Home network (ID 10004) and in Roaming network (ID 10104).

=== Parameters list ===
<table class="nd-othertables_2" style="width:100%; border-collapse: collapse;">
<tr>
<th style="width:1%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER NAME</th>
<th style="width:1%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER ID (RELATED AVL ID)</th>
<th style="width:5%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">DESCRIPTION</th>
<th style="width:3%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">VALUES</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Asset tracking modes</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 12150 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">In Basic tracking mode, the accelerometer is disabled. The device relies only on periodic wakeups whereas records are generated and sent at a fixed interval(s). 0 value in "Send period" field turns off periodic Low priority record sending.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0''' = Basic mode </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> By time (s)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">10000 (''Home'') 10100 (''Roaming'')</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">This parameter indicates a time interval in seconds in order to acquire a new record. If the value is 0 it means no records by min period will be saved.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> Minimum value '''= 0''' 
Maximum value '''= 2592000'''</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">Send period (s)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">10005 (''Home'') 10105 (''Roaming'')</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">This parameter indicates the frequency (time interval in seconds) of sending data to the server.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> Minimum value '''= 0''' 
Maximum value '''= 2592000'''</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">Min saved records</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 10004 (''Home'') 10104 (''Roaming'')</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">This parameter defines a minimum number of records in one data packet that can be sent to the server. It has a higher priority than data send period (s).</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> Minimum value '''= 1''' 
Maximum value '''= 225'''</td>
</tr>
</table>
}}

==Network operators settings==
[[File:FTX network operators settings.png|right|500 px]]
Operator selection logic utilizes three user-defined operator lists to control network connectivity: 

'''Roaming network operators'''
*List of operators that have the highest priority when the home network is unavailable.
'''Blacklisted network operators'''
*List of operators that are only connected to when no other higher priority operators are available. If the device is connected to a blacklisted operator, GPRS data sending is disabled. Device should continue checking if any higher priority operators are available. To avoid device looping between blacklisted operator and higher priority operator which is not registrable, ban list should be enabled. Otherwise it’s an expected behaviour.
'''Forbidden network operators'''
*List of operators that are not allowed to be connected to. If device connects to forbidden operator, operator is placed into FPLMN list and modem reset.
'''Ban list control'''
*'''Enable''' or '''disable''' the banning of mobile operators following repeated failed connection attempts, PDP activation failures, or APN configuration issues. The ban duration is 30 minutes.
 

{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| #default =
==Records profile settings==
[[File:FTX_Records_profile_settings.png|right|500 px]]

'''Data Acquisition Modes''' allow you to control how the device '''collects''' and '''sends''' records under different network (Home vs. Roaming) and movement (Moving vs. On Stop) conditions. By tailoring data acquisition profiles, you can optimize data usage and power consumption, ensuring that relevant information is captured and transmitted at appropriate intervals.

For example, you might configure the device to:
*Generate a record every '''1 minute''' when '''Home''' and '''Moving'''.
*Generate a record every '''10 minutes''' when '''Roaming''' and '''Moving'''.

===Prerequisites===
'''Connectivity'''
*The device must have available cellular connectivity to send data to a remote server.

'''Network Mode Awareness'''
*The device should identify whether it is in Home or Roaming mode.

'''Movement Detection'''
*The device needs a method (e.g., GNSS speed threshold, accelerometer, or ignition source) to determine whether it is currently Moving or On Stop.
'''Configuration Access'''
*A configuration tool or firmware interface is required to set the acquisition intervals and thresholds for each combination of '''GSM''' and '''Movement''' modes.

===Parameter Description===
'''Data Acquisition Profiles'''

Each combination of '''GSM Mode''' (Home, Roaming) and '''Movement Mode''' (Moving, On Stop) can have its own acquisition settings. Typical parameters within each profile include:
*'''Min Saved Records'''
**The minimum number of coordinates (records) that must be accumulated before the device attempts to send data to the server.
*'''Send Period'''
**Defines how often (in seconds or minutes) the device checks whether it has met the '''Min Saved Records''' threshold. If enough records are available, the device sends them; otherwise, it waits until the next send period.

<table class="wikitable" style="background-color: white;">
<tr>
<td> [[Image:Alert.png|center|50px]] </td>
<td> Device operates in GMT:0 time zone, without daylight saving. </td>
</tr>
</table>

'''Data Collection Methods'''
The device can collect records using one or more of the following methods '''simultaneously''':

*'''Time-Based Data Acquisition (Min Period)'''
**Acquires a record each time a specified interval of time passes.
**Setting this to zero '''disables''' time-based acquisition.

*'''Distance-Based Data Acquisition (Min Distance)'''
**Acquires a record when the device’s traveled distance (from the last recorded coordinate) exceeds a specified value (in meters).
**Setting this to zero '''disables''' distance-based acquisition.

*'''Angle-Based Data Acquisition (Min Angle)'''
**Acquires a record when the angle difference between the last recorded coordinate and the current heading exceeds a defined threshold (in degrees).
**Setting this to zero '''disables''' angle-based acquisition.

*'''Speed-Based Data Acquisition (Min Speed Delta)'''
**Acquires a record when the difference in speed (from the last recorded speed) exceeds a defined threshold (in km/h or m/s, depending on configuration).
**Setting this to zero '''disables''' speed-based acquisition.

[[Image:tracking parameters diagram.png|595px|none]]

'''Data Collection Methods'''

*'''Record Collection'''
**The device continuously checks for any of the enabled conditions (time, distance, angle, speed).
**If any threshold is met (e.g., Min Period elapsed, Min Distance exceeded), a new record is stored in internal memory.

*'''Record Storage & Batching'''
**Records are accumulated until '''Min Saved Records''' is reached or the '''Send Period''' timer expires.
**If neither condition is met, the device continues to collect data without initiating a connection.

*'''Data Transmission'''
**Once '''Min Saved Records''' is reached or the '''Send Period''' elapses (whichever comes first), the device attempts to send all stored records to the server.
**If the device is in '''Roaming mode''', it may use less frequent intervals to reduce data costs (based on your configuration).

*'''Profile Switching'''
**The device automatically switches to the corresponding profile when it detects changes in '''GSM Mode''' (Home ↔ Roaming) or '''Movement Mode''' (Moving ↔ On Stop).
**For instance, if the vehicle transitions from moving to a standstill, the device switches from the “Moving” to the “On Stop” settings.

*'''Configuration Overrides'''
**Certain high-priority events (e.g., crashes, alarms) may override the data acquisition intervals and send records immediately, regardless of the configured mode.

| ATM700
| ATC700 =
}}

{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| #default =
==On-Demand Tracking==
[[File:FTX_Tracking_On_demand_tracking.png|right|500px]]
On-demand tracking is a feature that allows forcing the device to generate high priority records at a configured period and to initiate data sending to a server.

On-demand tracking is useful for users who need to conveniently trigger records with certain periods in various situations, such as stolen vehicle recovery, precise company car usage tracking, and similar.

When an SMS/GPRS command or the configured I/O trigger activates on-demand tracking, the device starts periodically generating and sending high-priority records until the pre-defined duration elapses or a stop command is received.
===Prerequisites and Important Settings===
* Related [[SMS/GPRS command - on_demand_tracking]].
* The available I/O triggers depend on the hardware of your device.
* The priority of the I/O trigger must be set at least to Low (see [[{{{model}}} Input/output (I/O)]]).
* On-demand tracking interacts with periodic record acquisition (see [[#Records profile settings]]):
** If the on-demand tracking “Period” is '''longer''' than the periodic record “Send period” - on-demand records will be generated '''in parallel''' with the regular periodic records.
** If the on-demand tracking “Period” is '''shorter or equal''' than the periodic record “Send period” - periodic record acquisition will be '''suspended''' until on-demand tracking duration elapses or on-demand tracking stop command is received.
* The only way to stop on-demand tracking before its duration elapses is by sending a stop SMS/GPRS command.
===Basic Operation===
# The devices receives a trigger for on-demand tracking via either:
## [[SMS/GPRS command - on_demand_tracking]].
## I/O trigger, e.g. signal on DIN1 from the vehicle.
#The device generates high priority records every “Period” seconds, for the “Duration” of seconds, or until a stop command is received.
#On-demand tracking stops.
The number of generated records can be calculated using this formula:
* Number of records = (Duration/Period)+1, e.g.:
** Duration = 600, Period = 10 → (600/10)+1 = 60+1 = 61 records
* The result is rounded down to the nearest integer, e.g.:
** Duration = 19, Period = 10 → (19/10)+1 = 1.9+1 = 2.9 = 2 records
* If the duration is shorter than the period, only 1 record will be generated and on-demand tracking will stop:
** Duration = 59, Period = 60 → 1 record
===Parameters===
''Attention! The following parameters or their values depend on hardware/firmware - you may not see them in software:''
* ''Triggers''

<table class="nd-othertables_2" style="width:100%; border-collapse: collapse;">
<tr>
<th style="width:15%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER NAME</th>
<th style="width:15%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER ID (RELATED AVL ID)</th>
<th style="width:50%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">DESCRIPTION</th>
<th style="width:20%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">VALUE(S)</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Period (s)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">10990</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Time interval at which on-demand records will be generated.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Min=1 Max=60 Default="10"</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Duration (s)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">10991</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Time interval at which on-demand records will be generated.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Min=10 Max=3600 Default="600"</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Triggers</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">10992</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Select zero or more events which can activate on-demand tracking. The priority of corresponding I/O must be set to at least Low. To set multiple triggers using the SMS/GPRS command, send the sum of required values, e.g. DIN1 (1) + DIN3 (4) = 5.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">1=DIN1 2=DIN2 4=DIN3 8=DIN4 65536=AIN1 131072=AIN2 262144=AIN3 524288=AIN4</td>
</tr>
</table>

| ATM700
| ATC700 =
}}

==Records schedule==
[[File:Records Schedule TCT panel.png|right|500px]]

This feature, also known as the Scheduler, allows the device to wake up from a low-power sleep mode at pre-configured times to acquire a GNSS position and send a data record to a server. However, this feature can operate in any power Mode.

This functionality is essential for asset tracking scenarios where power conservation is critical, such as monitoring trailers, containers, or any equipment without a constant power source. By waking up only at specified intervals to report its location, the device can operate on its internal battery for extended periods.

The user can define up to six unique scheduled times for each weekday. At each configured time, the device exits its sleep state, activates its GNSS module to determine its current location, establishes a connection to send the data, and then returns to the same Mode until the next scheduled event. This ensures periodic updates while maximizing battery life.

When GNSS data is saved and transmitted according to the configured Scheduler, GNSS FIX acquisition for the next record is started earlier than the scheduled time.
The advance start time is dynamically calculated based on the GNSS FIX acquisition duration of the previous record.

Key points:
* The advance time cannot exceed the configured GNSS FIX search timeout.
* The maximum allowed advance offset is up to 10 minutes.

=== Prerequisites and Important Settings ===
* The device must be configured to operate in a sleep mode that supports scheduled wake-ups, such as "Deep Sleep" or "Online Deep Sleep" mode. This is typically configured in System > Power saving settings > Mode.
* Accurate time synchronization is required for the scheduler to function correctly. The device must be able to acquire the current time, either from a GNSS satellite fix or through an NTP server, before the schedules can be reliably executed.
* The device must have a server configured for data sending in Mobile Network > Primary server settings.

=== Basic Operation ===
* Entering Sleep Mode:
** After its initial configuration and data sending, the device enters the selected low-power sleep mode. In this state, most modules, including GNSS and the modem, are powered down to conserve energy.
* Scheduled Wake-up:
** The device's internal clock continuously runs. When the current time matches one of the configured schedules, the device initiates the wake-up sequence.
** The main controller powers on the GNSS module to acquire a satellite fix and determine the current coordinates.
* Data Record and Transmission:
** Once a position fix is obtained, the device powers on the modem.
** It creates a new data record containing the latest location information and other configured I/O parameters.
** The device establishes a connection to the server and sends the record.
* Returning to Sleep:
** After successfully sending the record, the device powers down the GNSS and modem modules.
** It then returns to the low-power sleep mode, awaiting the next scheduled wake-up time.
** If the device fails to get a GNSS fix or send the data within a predefined timeout, it will abort the process and return to sleep to prevent battery drain.

=== Parameters list ===
<table class="nd-othertables_2" style="width:100%; border-collapse: collapse;">
<tr>
<th style="width:1%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER NAME</th>
<th style="width:1%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER ID (RELATED AVL ID)</th>
<th style="width:5%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">DESCRIPTION</th>
<th style="width:6%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">VALUES</th>
</tr>
<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sunday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35100-35105 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the times for scheduled records on Sunday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>

<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Monday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35200-35205 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Monday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>

<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Tuesday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35300-35305 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Tuesday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>
<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Wednesday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35400-35405</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Wednesday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>
<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Friday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35600-35605</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Friday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>
<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Saturday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35700-35705</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Saturday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>

</table>

'''Note:''' Wakeup times in configuration are stored as a list of uint16 variables in format HHmm (range from 0 to 2359), for example: 12:00 -> 1200, 01:45 -> 145, 23:59 -> 2359. Default value for unconfigured timestamps is 2500.

=== Limitations, Edge Cases & Additional Notes ===
* A maximum of six unique schedules can be configured per weekday.
* The reliability of this feature is dependent on the device's ability to acquire a GNSS signal at the scheduled time. If the device is in a location with poor signal (e.g., indoors, underground garage), it may fail to get a fix and may not send a record.
* If the device's internal battery is completely drained, it will lose time synchronization and will not be able to execute scheduled wake-ups until it is powered on and can sync its clock again.

[[Category:{{{model}}} Configuration]]

Template:FTX Tracking settings

2026-03-31T11:15:11Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Records settings */

==Records settings==
{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| #default =
[[File:FTX records settings.png|right|500 px]]

| ATM700
| ATC700 =
[[File:ATX Records setting.png|right|500 px]]
}}
'''Saving/sending mode'''

This feature will be used to save and send records to the server without time synchronization.

'''Possible options:'''

'''After Position Fix''' - records will be saved and sent only after position fix. Coordinate acquisition time is configured via the ‘GNSS position fix search timeout’ parameter.

'''After Time Sync''' - records will be saved and sent only after time synchronization. “GNSS position fix search timeout” is not used here; therefore, records may lack GNSS location data.

'''Always''' - records will always be saved and sent even if there is no time synchronization. “GNSS position fix search timeout” is not used here; therefore, records may lack GNSS location data.

'''Note''': If the record is without valid coordinates – (there were no GPS fix at the moment of data acquisition) – Longitude, Latitude and Altitude values are sent as per the last valid fix, and Angle, Satellites and Speed will be 0. However, if there is a reboot then it will send zero coordinates.

{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| ATM700
| ATC700 =
'''GNSS position fix search timeout (s)'''

GNSS position fix search timeout in seconds, after timeout periodic and scheduled records are generated without position fix and sleep is allowed.

* This parameter is measured in seconds. Default value is 120 seconds.
* Minimal value = 0 seconds, maximum value = 86400 seconds.
}}

'''Sort by'''

Can be set as either Newest or Oldest. For example, if the Oldest is marked, the device first will send the Oldest information, and if the Newest is marked, the device will send the newest information. Suppose the device had no connection (GSM or GPRS) due to bad coverage or being in an area with no signal, the device continues to save records into internal memory, and once GSM and GPRS are recovered, the device will start sending saved data to the server. In this example, if Oldest is configured - until the newest data is seen on the server, all of the oldest records have to be sent first. If Newest is configured - previous data and track won't be seen until the newest data is sent first. If high priority on I/O parameters or Features is configured device will send the generated records with High Priority first.

'''Server Confirmation Method'''

Defines the device's ability to establish GPRS connection through specific acknowledgement (ACK) type. Can be set as either TCP/IP or AVL.

If '''TCP/IP''' is selected, then server acknowledgement is not needed and the device will accept TCP/IP layer ACK.

If '''AVL''' is selected, then the server must respond with an acknowledgement.

'''Data protocol'''

In ''Data Protocol'' only protocol version ('''[[Codec#Codec 8 Extended|Codec 8 Extended]]''') is available for data sending to the server. 

{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| ATM700
| ATC700 =
== Asset tracking modes ==
[[File:Asset tracking modes.png|right|500 px]]
'''Note:'''This scenario is only available for asset tracking (''ATX'') devices.
Asset tracking modes functionality controls records profiles with conditions on when records are being saved and sent.

=== Basic movement mode ===
In Basic tracking mode, the accelerometer is disabled. The device relies only on periodic wake-ups. Records are generated and sent at a fixed interval. Depending on configured periodic record priority, records can be:
*Sent immediately when generated in High priority case.
*Stored until they are sent in batches in Low priority case.

Record generation and sending uses periodic record configuration parameters. 
Records are generated at a fixed interval, configurable via parameters “'''By time'''” - in Home network (ID 10000) and in Roaming network (ID 10100).

Records are sent at a separate fixed interval, configurable via parameters “'''Send period'''” - in Home network (ID 10005) and in Roaming network (ID 10105).

If the device is configured to send records in Low priority, minimum number of records have to be generated before sending occurs. This value can be configured via parameters “'''Min Saved Records'''” - in Home network (ID 10004) and in Roaming network (ID 10104).

=== Parameters list ===
<table class="nd-othertables_2" style="width:100%; border-collapse: collapse;">
<tr>
<th style="width:1%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER NAME</th>
<th style="width:1%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER ID (RELATED AVL ID)</th>
<th style="width:5%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">DESCRIPTION</th>
<th style="width:3%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">VALUES</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Asset tracking modes</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 12150 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">In Basic tracking mode, the accelerometer is disabled. The device relies only on periodic wakeups whereas records are generated and sent at a fixed interval(s). 0 value in "Send period" field turns off periodic Low priority record sending.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0''' = Basic mode </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> By time (s)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">10000 (''Home'') 10100 (''Roaming'')</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">This parameter indicates a time interval in seconds in order to acquire a new record. If the value is 0 it means no records by min period will be saved.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> Minimum value '''= 0''' 
Maximum value '''= 2592000'''</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">Send period (s)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">10005 (''Home'') 10105 (''Roaming'')</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">This parameter indicates the frequency (time interval in seconds) of sending data to the server.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> Minimum value '''= 0''' 
Maximum value '''= 2592000'''</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">Min saved records</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 10004 (''Home'') 10104 (''Roaming'')</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">This parameter defines a minimum number of records in one data packet that can be sent to the server. It has a higher priority than data send period (s).</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> Minimum value '''= 1''' 
Maximum value '''= 225'''</td>
</tr>
</table>
}}

==Network operators settings==
[[File:FTX network operators settings.png|right|500 px]]
Operator selection logic utilizes three user-defined operator lists to control network connectivity: 

'''Roaming network operators'''
*List of operators that have the highest priority when the home network is unavailable.
'''Blacklisted network operators'''
*List of operators that are only connected to when no other higher priority operators are available. If the device is connected to a blacklisted operator, GPRS data sending is disabled. Device should continue checking if any higher priority operators are available. To avoid device looping between blacklisted operator and higher priority operator which is not registrable, ban list should be enabled. Otherwise it’s an expected behaviour.
'''Forbidden network operators'''
*List of operators that are not allowed to be connected to. If device connects to forbidden operator, operator is placed into FPLMN list and modem reset.
'''Ban list control'''
*'''Enable''' or '''disable''' the banning of mobile operators following repeated failed connection attempts, PDP activation failures, or APN configuration issues. The ban duration is 30 minutes.
 

{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| #default =
==Records profile settings==
[[File:FTX_Records_profile_settings.png|right|500 px]]

'''Data Acquisition Modes''' allow you to control how the device '''collects''' and '''sends''' records under different network (Home vs. Roaming) and movement (Moving vs. On Stop) conditions. By tailoring data acquisition profiles, you can optimize data usage and power consumption, ensuring that relevant information is captured and transmitted at appropriate intervals.

For example, you might configure the device to:
*Generate a record every '''1 minute''' when '''Home''' and '''Moving'''.
*Generate a record every '''10 minutes''' when '''Roaming''' and '''Moving'''.

===Prerequisites===
'''Connectivity'''
*The device must have available cellular connectivity to send data to a remote server.

'''Network Mode Awareness'''
*The device should identify whether it is in Home or Roaming mode.

'''Movement Detection'''
*The device needs a method (e.g., GNSS speed threshold, accelerometer, or ignition source) to determine whether it is currently Moving or On Stop.
'''Configuration Access'''
*A configuration tool or firmware interface is required to set the acquisition intervals and thresholds for each combination of '''GSM''' and '''Movement''' modes.

===Parameter Description===
'''Data Acquisition Profiles'''

Each combination of '''GSM Mode''' (Home, Roaming) and '''Movement Mode''' (Moving, On Stop) can have its own acquisition settings. Typical parameters within each profile include:
*'''Min Saved Records'''
**The minimum number of coordinates (records) that must be accumulated before the device attempts to send data to the server.
*'''Send Period'''
**Defines how often (in seconds or minutes) the device checks whether it has met the '''Min Saved Records''' threshold. If enough records are available, the device sends them; otherwise, it waits until the next send period.

<table class="wikitable" style="background-color: white;">
<tr>
<td> [[Image:Alert.png|center|50px]] </td>
<td> Device operates in GMT:0 time zone, without daylight saving. </td>
</tr>
</table>

'''Data Collection Methods'''
The device can collect records using one or more of the following methods '''simultaneously''':

*'''Time-Based Data Acquisition (Min Period)'''
**Acquires a record each time a specified interval of time passes.
**Setting this to zero '''disables''' time-based acquisition.

*'''Distance-Based Data Acquisition (Min Distance)'''
**Acquires a record when the device’s traveled distance (from the last recorded coordinate) exceeds a specified value (in meters).
**Setting this to zero '''disables''' distance-based acquisition.

*'''Angle-Based Data Acquisition (Min Angle)'''
**Acquires a record when the angle difference between the last recorded coordinate and the current heading exceeds a defined threshold (in degrees).
**Setting this to zero '''disables''' angle-based acquisition.

*'''Speed-Based Data Acquisition (Min Speed Delta)'''
**Acquires a record when the difference in speed (from the last recorded speed) exceeds a defined threshold (in km/h or m/s, depending on configuration).
**Setting this to zero '''disables''' speed-based acquisition.

[[Image:tracking parameters diagram.png|595px|none]]

'''Data Collection Methods'''

*'''Record Collection'''
**The device continuously checks for any of the enabled conditions (time, distance, angle, speed).
**If any threshold is met (e.g., Min Period elapsed, Min Distance exceeded), a new record is stored in internal memory.

*'''Record Storage & Batching'''
**Records are accumulated until '''Min Saved Records''' is reached or the '''Send Period''' timer expires.
**If neither condition is met, the device continues to collect data without initiating a connection.

*'''Data Transmission'''
**Once '''Min Saved Records''' is reached or the '''Send Period''' elapses (whichever comes first), the device attempts to send all stored records to the server.
**If the device is in '''Roaming mode''', it may use less frequent intervals to reduce data costs (based on your configuration).

*'''Profile Switching'''
**The device automatically switches to the corresponding profile when it detects changes in '''GSM Mode''' (Home ↔ Roaming) or '''Movement Mode''' (Moving ↔ On Stop).
**For instance, if the vehicle transitions from moving to a standstill, the device switches from the “Moving” to the “On Stop” settings.

*'''Configuration Overrides'''
**Certain high-priority events (e.g., crashes, alarms) may override the data acquisition intervals and send records immediately, regardless of the configured mode.

| ATM700
| ATC700 =
}}

{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| #default =
==On-Demand Tracking==
[[File:FTX_Tracking_On_demand_tracking.png|right|500px]]
On-demand tracking is a feature that allows forcing the device to generate high priority records at a configured period and to initiate data sending to a server.

On-demand tracking is useful for users who need to conveniently trigger records with certain periods in various situations, such as stolen vehicle recovery, precise company car usage tracking, and similar.

When an SMS/GPRS command or the configured I/O trigger activates on-demand tracking, the device starts periodically generating and sending high-priority records until the pre-defined duration elapses or a stop command is received.
===Prerequisites and Important Settings===
* Related [[SMS/GPRS command - on_demand_tracking]].
* The available I/O triggers depend on the hardware of your device.
* The priority of the I/O trigger must be set at least to Low (see [[{{{model}}} Input/output (I/O)]]).
* On-demand tracking interacts with periodic record acquisition (see [[#Records profile settings]]):
** If the on-demand tracking “Period” is '''longer''' than the periodic record “Send period” - on-demand records will be generated '''in parallel''' with the regular periodic records.
** If the on-demand tracking “Period” is '''shorter or equal''' than the periodic record “Send period” - periodic record acquisition will be '''suspended''' until on-demand tracking duration elapses or on-demand tracking stop command is received.
* The only way to stop on-demand tracking before its duration elapses is by sending a stop SMS/GPRS command.
===Basic Operation===
# The devices receives a trigger for on-demand tracking via either:
## [[SMS/GPRS command - on_demand_tracking]].
## I/O trigger, e.g. signal on DIN1 from the vehicle.
#The device generates high priority records every “Period” seconds, for the “Duration” of seconds, or until a stop command is received.
#On-demand tracking stops.
The number of generated records can be calculated using this formula:
* Number of records = (Duration/Period)+1, e.g.:
** Duration = 600, Period = 10 → (600/10)+1 = 60+1 = 61 records
* The result is rounded down to the nearest integer, e.g.:
** Duration = 19, Period = 10 → (19/10)+1 = 1.9+1 = 2.9 = 2 records
* If the duration is shorter than the period, only 1 record will be generated and on-demand tracking will stop:
** Duration = 59, Period = 60 → 1 record
===Parameters===
''Attention! The following parameters or their values depend on hardware/firmware - you may not see them in software:''
* ''Triggers''

<table class="nd-othertables_2" style="width:100%; border-collapse: collapse;">
<tr>
<th style="width:15%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER NAME</th>
<th style="width:15%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER ID (RELATED AVL ID)</th>
<th style="width:50%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">DESCRIPTION</th>
<th style="width:20%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">VALUE(S)</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Period (s)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">10990</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Time interval at which on-demand records will be generated.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Min=1 Max=60 Default="10"</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Duration (s)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">10991</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Time interval at which on-demand records will be generated.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Min=10 Max=3600 Default="600"</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Triggers</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">10992</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Select zero or more events which can activate on-demand tracking. The priority of corresponding I/O must be set to at least Low. To set multiple triggers using the SMS/GPRS command, send the sum of required values, e.g. DIN1 (1) + DIN3 (4) = 5.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">1=DIN1 2=DIN2 4=DIN3 8=DIN4 65536=AIN1 131072=AIN2 262144=AIN3 524288=AIN4</td>
</tr>
</table>

| ATM700
| ATC700 =
}}

==Records schedule==
[[File:Records Schedule TCT panel.png|right|500px]]

This feature, also known as the Scheduler, allows the device to wake up from a low-power sleep mode at pre-configured times to acquire a GNSS position and send a data record to a server. However, this feature can operate in any power Mode.

This functionality is essential for asset tracking scenarios where power conservation is critical, such as monitoring trailers, containers, or any equipment without a constant power source. By waking up only at specified intervals to report its location, the device can operate on its internal battery for extended periods.

The user can define up to six unique scheduled times for each weekday. At each configured time, the device exits its sleep state, activates its GNSS module to determine its current location, establishes a connection to send the data, and then returns to the same Mode until the next scheduled event. This ensures periodic updates while maximizing battery life.

When GNSS data is saved and transmitted according to the configured Scheduler, GNSS FIX acquisition for the next record is started earlier than the scheduled time.
The advance start time is dynamically calculated based on the GNSS FIX acquisition duration of the previous record.

Key points:
* The advance time cannot exceed the configured GNSS FIX search timeout.
* The maximum allowed advance offset is up to 10 minutes.

=== Prerequisites and Important Settings ===
* The device must be configured to operate in a sleep mode that supports scheduled wake-ups, such as "Deep Sleep" or "Online Deep Sleep" mode. This is typically configured in System > Power saving settings > Mode.
* Accurate time synchronization is required for the scheduler to function correctly. The device must be able to acquire the current time, either from a GNSS satellite fix or through an NTP server, before the schedules can be reliably executed.
* The device must have a server configured for data sending in Mobile Network > Primary server settings.

=== Basic Operation ===
* Entering Sleep Mode:
** After its initial configuration and data sending, the device enters the selected low-power sleep mode. In this state, most modules, including GNSS and the modem, are powered down to conserve energy.
* Scheduled Wake-up:
** The device's internal clock continuously runs. When the current time matches one of the configured schedules, the device initiates the wake-up sequence.
** The main controller powers on the GNSS module to acquire a satellite fix and determine the current coordinates.
* Data Record and Transmission:
** Once a position fix is obtained, the device powers on the modem.
** It creates a new data record containing the latest location information and other configured I/O parameters.
** The device establishes a connection to the server and sends the record.
* Returning to Sleep:
** After successfully sending the record, the device powers down the GNSS and modem modules.
** It then returns to the low-power sleep mode, awaiting the next scheduled wake-up time.
** If the device fails to get a GNSS fix or send the data within a predefined timeout, it will abort the process and return to sleep to prevent battery drain.

=== Parameters list ===
<table class="nd-othertables_2" style="width:100%; border-collapse: collapse;">
<tr>
<th style="width:1%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER NAME</th>
<th style="width:1%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER ID (RELATED AVL ID)</th>
<th style="width:5%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">DESCRIPTION</th>
<th style="width:6%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">VALUES</th>
</tr>
<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sunday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35100-35105 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the times for scheduled records on Sunday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>

<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Monday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35200-35205 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Monday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>

<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Tuesday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35300-35305 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Tuesday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>
<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Wednesday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35400-35405</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Wednesday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>
<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Friday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35600-35605</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Friday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>
<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Saturday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35700-35705</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Saturday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>

</table>

'''Note:''' Wakeup times in configuration are stored as a list of uint16 variables in format HHmm (range from 0 to 2359), for example: 12:00 -> 1200, 01:45 -> 145, 23:59 -> 2359. Default value for unconfigured timestamps is 2500.

=== Limitations, Edge Cases & Additional Notes ===
* A maximum of six unique schedules can be configured per weekday.
* The reliability of this feature is dependent on the device's ability to acquire a GNSS signal at the scheduled time. If the device is in a location with poor signal (e.g., indoors, underground garage), it may fail to get a fix and may not send a record.
* If the device's internal battery is completely drained, it will lose time synchronization and will not be able to execute scheduled wake-ups until it is powered on and can sync its clock again.

[[Category:{{{model}}} Configuration]]

Template:FTX Tracking settings

2026-03-24T08:21:01Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Records schedule */

==Records settings==
{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| #default =
[[File:FTX records settings.png|right|500 px]]

| ATM700
| ATC700 =
[[File:ATX Records setting.png|right|500 px]]
}}
'''Saving/sending mode'''

This feature will be used to save and send records to the server without time synchronization.

'''Possible options:'''

'''After Position Fix''' - records will be saved and sent only after position fix.

'''After Time Sync''' - records will be saved and sent only after time synchronization.

'''Always''' - records will always be saved and sent even if there is no time synchronization.

'''Note''': If the record is without valid coordinates – (there were no GPS fix at the moment of data acquisition) – Longitude, Latitude and Altitude values are sent as per the last valid fix, and Angle, Satellites and Speed will be 0. However, if there is a reboot then it will send zero coordinates.

{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| ATM700
| ATC700 =
'''GNSS position fix search timeout (s)'''

GNSS position fix search timeout in seconds, after timeout periodic and scheduled records are generated without position fix and sleep is allowed.

* This parameter is measured in seconds. Default value is 120 seconds.
* Minimal value = 0 seconds, maximum value = 86400 seconds.
}}

'''Sort by'''

Can be set as either Newest or Oldest. For example, if the Oldest is marked, the device first will send the Oldest information, and if the Newest is marked, the device will send the newest information. Suppose the device had no connection (GSM or GPRS) due to bad coverage or being in an area with no signal, the device continues to save records into internal memory, and once GSM and GPRS are recovered, the device will start sending saved data to the server. In this example, if Oldest is configured - until the newest data is seen on the server, all of the oldest records have to be sent first. If Newest is configured - previous data and track won't be seen until the newest data is sent first. If high priority on I/O parameters or Features is configured device will send the generated records with High Priority first.

'''Server Confirmation Method'''

Defines the device's ability to establish GPRS connection through specific acknowledgement (ACK) type. Can be set as either TCP/IP or AVL.

If '''TCP/IP''' is selected, then server acknowledgement is not needed and the device will accept TCP/IP layer ACK.

If '''AVL''' is selected, then the server must respond with an acknowledgement.

'''Data protocol'''

In ''Data Protocol'' only protocol version ('''[[Codec#Codec 8 Extended|Codec 8 Extended]]''') is available for data sending to the server. 

{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| ATM700
| ATC700 =
== Asset tracking modes ==
[[File:Asset tracking modes.png|right|500 px]]
'''Note:'''This scenario is only available for asset tracking (''ATX'') devices.
Asset tracking modes functionality controls records profiles with conditions on when records are being saved and sent.

=== Basic movement mode ===
In Basic tracking mode, the accelerometer is disabled. The device relies only on periodic wake-ups. Records are generated and sent at a fixed interval. Depending on configured periodic record priority, records can be:
*Sent immediately when generated in High priority case.
*Stored until they are sent in batches in Low priority case.

Record generation and sending uses periodic record configuration parameters. 
Records are generated at a fixed interval, configurable via parameters “'''By time'''” - in Home network (ID 10000) and in Roaming network (ID 10100).

Records are sent at a separate fixed interval, configurable via parameters “'''Send period'''” - in Home network (ID 10005) and in Roaming network (ID 10105).

If the device is configured to send records in Low priority, minimum number of records have to be generated before sending occurs. This value can be configured via parameters “'''Min Saved Records'''” - in Home network (ID 10004) and in Roaming network (ID 10104).

=== Parameters list ===
<table class="nd-othertables_2" style="width:100%; border-collapse: collapse;">
<tr>
<th style="width:1%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER NAME</th>
<th style="width:1%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER ID (RELATED AVL ID)</th>
<th style="width:5%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">DESCRIPTION</th>
<th style="width:3%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">VALUES</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Asset tracking modes</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 12150 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">In Basic tracking mode, the accelerometer is disabled. The device relies only on periodic wakeups whereas records are generated and sent at a fixed interval(s). 0 value in "Send period" field turns off periodic Low priority record sending.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0''' = Basic mode </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> By time (s)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">10000 (''Home'') 10100 (''Roaming'')</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">This parameter indicates a time interval in seconds in order to acquire a new record. If the value is 0 it means no records by min period will be saved.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> Minimum value '''= 0''' 
Maximum value '''= 2592000'''</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">Send period (s)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">10005 (''Home'') 10105 (''Roaming'')</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">This parameter indicates the frequency (time interval in seconds) of sending data to the server.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> Minimum value '''= 0''' 
Maximum value '''= 2592000'''</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">Min saved records</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 10004 (''Home'') 10104 (''Roaming'')</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">This parameter defines a minimum number of records in one data packet that can be sent to the server. It has a higher priority than data send period (s).</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> Minimum value '''= 1''' 
Maximum value '''= 225'''</td>
</tr>
</table>
}}

==Network operators settings==
[[File:FTX network operators settings.png|right|500 px]]
Operator selection logic utilizes three user-defined operator lists to control network connectivity: 

'''Roaming network operators'''
*List of operators that have the highest priority when the home network is unavailable.
'''Blacklisted network operators'''
*List of operators that are only connected to when no other higher priority operators are available. If the device is connected to a blacklisted operator, GPRS data sending is disabled. Device should continue checking if any higher priority operators are available. To avoid device looping between blacklisted operator and higher priority operator which is not registrable, ban list should be enabled. Otherwise it’s an expected behaviour.
'''Forbidden network operators'''
*List of operators that are not allowed to be connected to. If device connects to forbidden operator, operator is placed into FPLMN list and modem reset.
'''Ban list control'''
*'''Enable''' or '''disable''' the banning of mobile operators following repeated failed connection attempts, PDP activation failures, or APN configuration issues. The ban duration is 30 minutes.
 

{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| #default =
==Records profile settings==
[[File:FTX_Records_profile_settings.png|right|500 px]]

'''Data Acquisition Modes''' allow you to control how the device '''collects''' and '''sends''' records under different network (Home vs. Roaming) and movement (Moving vs. On Stop) conditions. By tailoring data acquisition profiles, you can optimize data usage and power consumption, ensuring that relevant information is captured and transmitted at appropriate intervals.

For example, you might configure the device to:
*Generate a record every '''1 minute''' when '''Home''' and '''Moving'''.
*Generate a record every '''10 minutes''' when '''Roaming''' and '''Moving'''.

===Prerequisites===
'''Connectivity'''
*The device must have available cellular connectivity to send data to a remote server.

'''Network Mode Awareness'''
*The device should identify whether it is in Home or Roaming mode.

'''Movement Detection'''
*The device needs a method (e.g., GNSS speed threshold, accelerometer, or ignition source) to determine whether it is currently Moving or On Stop.
'''Configuration Access'''
*A configuration tool or firmware interface is required to set the acquisition intervals and thresholds for each combination of '''GSM''' and '''Movement''' modes.

===Parameter Description===
'''Data Acquisition Profiles'''

Each combination of '''GSM Mode''' (Home, Roaming) and '''Movement Mode''' (Moving, On Stop) can have its own acquisition settings. Typical parameters within each profile include:
*'''Min Saved Records'''
**The minimum number of coordinates (records) that must be accumulated before the device attempts to send data to the server.
*'''Send Period'''
**Defines how often (in seconds or minutes) the device checks whether it has met the '''Min Saved Records''' threshold. If enough records are available, the device sends them; otherwise, it waits until the next send period.

<table class="wikitable" style="background-color: white;">
<tr>
<td> [[Image:Alert.png|center|50px]] </td>
<td> Device operates in GMT:0 time zone, without daylight saving. </td>
</tr>
</table>

'''Data Collection Methods'''
The device can collect records using one or more of the following methods '''simultaneously''':

*'''Time-Based Data Acquisition (Min Period)'''
**Acquires a record each time a specified interval of time passes.
**Setting this to zero '''disables''' time-based acquisition.

*'''Distance-Based Data Acquisition (Min Distance)'''
**Acquires a record when the device’s traveled distance (from the last recorded coordinate) exceeds a specified value (in meters).
**Setting this to zero '''disables''' distance-based acquisition.

*'''Angle-Based Data Acquisition (Min Angle)'''
**Acquires a record when the angle difference between the last recorded coordinate and the current heading exceeds a defined threshold (in degrees).
**Setting this to zero '''disables''' angle-based acquisition.

*'''Speed-Based Data Acquisition (Min Speed Delta)'''
**Acquires a record when the difference in speed (from the last recorded speed) exceeds a defined threshold (in km/h or m/s, depending on configuration).
**Setting this to zero '''disables''' speed-based acquisition.

[[Image:tracking parameters diagram.png|595px|none]]

'''Data Collection Methods'''

*'''Record Collection'''
**The device continuously checks for any of the enabled conditions (time, distance, angle, speed).
**If any threshold is met (e.g., Min Period elapsed, Min Distance exceeded), a new record is stored in internal memory.

*'''Record Storage & Batching'''
**Records are accumulated until '''Min Saved Records''' is reached or the '''Send Period''' timer expires.
**If neither condition is met, the device continues to collect data without initiating a connection.

*'''Data Transmission'''
**Once '''Min Saved Records''' is reached or the '''Send Period''' elapses (whichever comes first), the device attempts to send all stored records to the server.
**If the device is in '''Roaming mode''', it may use less frequent intervals to reduce data costs (based on your configuration).

*'''Profile Switching'''
**The device automatically switches to the corresponding profile when it detects changes in '''GSM Mode''' (Home ↔ Roaming) or '''Movement Mode''' (Moving ↔ On Stop).
**For instance, if the vehicle transitions from moving to a standstill, the device switches from the “Moving” to the “On Stop” settings.

*'''Configuration Overrides'''
**Certain high-priority events (e.g., crashes, alarms) may override the data acquisition intervals and send records immediately, regardless of the configured mode.

| ATM700
| ATC700 =
}}

{{#switch: {{{model}}}
| #default =
==On-Demand Tracking==
[[File:FTX_Tracking_On_demand_tracking.png|right|500px]]
On-demand tracking is a feature that allows forcing the device to generate high priority records at a configured period and to initiate data sending to a server.

On-demand tracking is useful for users who need to conveniently trigger records with certain periods in various situations, such as stolen vehicle recovery, precise company car usage tracking, and similar.

When an SMS/GPRS command or the configured I/O trigger activates on-demand tracking, the device starts periodically generating and sending high-priority records until the pre-defined duration elapses or a stop command is received.
===Prerequisites and Important Settings===
* Related [[SMS/GPRS command - on_demand_tracking]].
* The available I/O triggers depend on the hardware of your device.
* The priority of the I/O trigger must be set at least to Low (see [[{{{model}}} Input/output (I/O)]]).
* On-demand tracking interacts with periodic record acquisition (see [[#Records profile settings]]):
** If the on-demand tracking “Period” is '''longer''' than the periodic record “Send period” - on-demand records will be generated '''in parallel''' with the regular periodic records.
** If the on-demand tracking “Period” is '''shorter or equal''' than the periodic record “Send period” - periodic record acquisition will be '''suspended''' until on-demand tracking duration elapses or on-demand tracking stop command is received.
* The only way to stop on-demand tracking before its duration elapses is by sending a stop SMS/GPRS command.
===Basic Operation===
# The devices receives a trigger for on-demand tracking via either:
## [[SMS/GPRS command - on_demand_tracking]].
## I/O trigger, e.g. signal on DIN1 from the vehicle.
#The device generates high priority records every “Period” seconds, for the “Duration” of seconds, or until a stop command is received.
#On-demand tracking stops.
The number of generated records can be calculated using this formula:
* Number of records = (Duration/Period)+1, e.g.:
** Duration = 600, Period = 10 → (600/10)+1 = 60+1 = 61 records
* The result is rounded down to the nearest integer, e.g.:
** Duration = 19, Period = 10 → (19/10)+1 = 1.9+1 = 2.9 = 2 records
* If the duration is shorter than the period, only 1 record will be generated and on-demand tracking will stop:
** Duration = 59, Period = 60 → 1 record
===Parameters===
''Attention! The following parameters or their values depend on hardware/firmware - you may not see them in software:''
* ''Triggers''

<table class="nd-othertables_2" style="width:100%; border-collapse: collapse;">
<tr>
<th style="width:15%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER NAME</th>
<th style="width:15%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER ID (RELATED AVL ID)</th>
<th style="width:50%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">DESCRIPTION</th>
<th style="width:20%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">VALUE(S)</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Period (s)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">10990</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Time interval at which on-demand records will be generated.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Min=1 Max=60 Default="10"</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Duration (s)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">10991</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Time interval at which on-demand records will be generated.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Min=10 Max=3600 Default="600"</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Triggers</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">10992</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">Select zero or more events which can activate on-demand tracking. The priority of corresponding I/O must be set to at least Low. To set multiple triggers using the SMS/GPRS command, send the sum of required values, e.g. DIN1 (1) + DIN3 (4) = 5.</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;">1=DIN1 2=DIN2 4=DIN3 8=DIN4 65536=AIN1 131072=AIN2 262144=AIN3 524288=AIN4</td>
</tr>
</table>

| ATM700
| ATC700 =
}}

==Records schedule==
[[File:Records Schedule TCT panel.png|right|500px]]

This feature, also known as the Scheduler, allows the device to wake up from a low-power sleep mode at pre-configured times to acquire a GNSS position and send a data record to a server. However, this feature can operate in any power Mode.

This functionality is essential for asset tracking scenarios where power conservation is critical, such as monitoring trailers, containers, or any equipment without a constant power source. By waking up only at specified intervals to report its location, the device can operate on its internal battery for extended periods.

The user can define up to six unique scheduled times for each weekday. At each configured time, the device exits its sleep state, activates its GNSS module to determine its current location, establishes a connection to send the data, and then returns to the same Mode until the next scheduled event. This ensures periodic updates while maximizing battery life.

When GNSS data is saved and transmitted according to the configured Scheduler, GNSS FIX acquisition for the next record is started earlier than the scheduled time.
The advance start time is dynamically calculated based on the GNSS FIX acquisition duration of the previous record.

Key points:
* The advance time cannot exceed the configured GNSS FIX search timeout.
* The maximum allowed advance offset is up to 10 minutes.

=== Prerequisites and Important Settings ===
* The device must be configured to operate in a sleep mode that supports scheduled wake-ups, such as "Deep Sleep" or "Online Deep Sleep" mode. This is typically configured in System > Power saving settings > Mode.
* Accurate time synchronization is required for the scheduler to function correctly. The device must be able to acquire the current time, either from a GNSS satellite fix or through an NTP server, before the schedules can be reliably executed.
* The device must have a server configured for data sending in Mobile Network > Primary server settings.

=== Basic Operation ===
* Entering Sleep Mode:
** After its initial configuration and data sending, the device enters the selected low-power sleep mode. In this state, most modules, including GNSS and the modem, are powered down to conserve energy.
* Scheduled Wake-up:
** The device's internal clock continuously runs. When the current time matches one of the configured schedules, the device initiates the wake-up sequence.
** The main controller powers on the GNSS module to acquire a satellite fix and determine the current coordinates.
* Data Record and Transmission:
** Once a position fix is obtained, the device powers on the modem.
** It creates a new data record containing the latest location information and other configured I/O parameters.
** The device establishes a connection to the server and sends the record.
* Returning to Sleep:
** After successfully sending the record, the device powers down the GNSS and modem modules.
** It then returns to the low-power sleep mode, awaiting the next scheduled wake-up time.
** If the device fails to get a GNSS fix or send the data within a predefined timeout, it will abort the process and return to sleep to prevent battery drain.

=== Parameters list ===
<table class="nd-othertables_2" style="width:100%; border-collapse: collapse;">
<tr>
<th style="width:1%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER NAME</th>
<th style="width:1%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">PARAMETER ID (RELATED AVL ID)</th>
<th style="width:5%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">DESCRIPTION</th>
<th style="width:6%; vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;">VALUES</th>
</tr>
<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sunday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35100-35105 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the times for scheduled records on Sunday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>

<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Monday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35200-35205 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Monday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>

<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Tuesday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35300-35305 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Tuesday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>
<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Wednesday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35400-35405</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Wednesday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>
<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Friday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35600-35605</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Friday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>
<tr>

<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Saturday Time 1-6 </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> 35700-35705</td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"> Sets the time for a scheduled record on Saturday </td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: left;"> '''0-2359''' or '''2500''' </td>

</tr>

</table>

'''Note:''' Wakeup times in configuration are stored as a list of uint16 variables in format HHmm (range from 0 to 2359), for example: 12:00 -> 1200, 01:45 -> 145, 23:59 -> 2359. Default value for unconfigured timestamps is 2500.

=== Limitations, Edge Cases & Additional Notes ===
* A maximum of six unique schedules can be configured per weekday.
* The reliability of this feature is dependent on the device's ability to acquire a GNSS signal at the scheduled time. If the device is in a location with poor signal (e.g., indoors, underground garage), it may fail to get a fix and may not send a record.
* If the device's internal battery is completely drained, it will lose time synchronization and will not be able to execute scheduled wake-ups until it is powered on and can sync its clock again.

[[Category:{{{model}}} Configuration]]

Getting started with TCT

2026-03-03T13:08:29Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* FOTA WEB Configuration Accessibility */

[[Category:Telematics Configuration Tool (TCT)]]
{| align="right"
|__TOC__
|}

This page will provide you with all the necessary information needed to successfully launch the TCT application on your PC for the first time. Moreover, we will cover the different types of configuration files (offline vs online) you can create with the help of TCT.

==Minimum System Requirements==

{| class="wikitable"
|'''OS'''||Windows 10; Windows 11
|-
|'''CPU'''||Intel or AMD processor with 64-bit support
|-
|'''Disk Storage'''||1 GB of free disk space
|-
|'''Memory'''||500 MB of free RAM
|-
|'''Graphics'''||DirectX 9 or later with WDDM 1.0 driver
|-
|'''Internet'''||Ethernet port or Wi-Fi with network access for auto-update
|}

== Important information ==
Before continuing please read information below:

* From TCT '''2.0.0''' onwards, only FT platform devices are supported.
* For TCT '''1.X.XX''' versions auto-update feature doesn't work.

==Launching TCT desktop version==

===TCT Download Link===
Below you can find the installation file for the latest version of TCT:
{| class="wikitable"
! style="width:100px;" | Version
! style="width:100px;" | Upload date
! Link
! Comment
|-
| style="text-align: center;"| '''3.0.30'''
| style="text-align: center;"| 2026-03-02
| [[File:Download_zip.png|x100px|link=https://github.com/teltonika-telematics/tct/releases/download/v3.0.30/TelematicsConfigurationTool.Setup.3.0.30-windows-x86_64bit.zip]]
| The desktop application's underlying framework has been migrated from '''Electron.NET''' to the lightweight '''Photino.NET'''. This change is the primary reason for the major version increment. Installing TCT 3.0.0 or any subsequent version will not automatically remove previous TCT 2.0.X installations. To avoid potential conflicts and reclaim disk space, you must manually uninstall any TCT 2.0.X versions.
|}

----

===Installation guide===
Follow the steps below in order to install TCT on your PC:
#Install TelematicsConfigurationTool.Setup.exe with admin privileges.
#Accept the license agreement.
#Choose whether TCT should be available to all users or just to you (current user).
#Select the location where you want to install TCT. By default, TCT is installed in the program files. However, you can install it anywhere you want.
#Wait until the installation is complete and click '''Finish''' to exit installation wizard.
----
'''Information below is relevant for TCT version 1.1.80 or older.'''

'''''IMPORTANT NOTES'''''

Windows smart screen may appear during first installation. If this occurs please follow the steps below: [[File:WindowsSmartScreen.png|right|421x421px]]
#Click on '''More info''' to access additional details about the application; 
#Make sure that the application name is '''TelematicsConfigurationTool.Setup.x.x.x.exe.''' Take into account that '''"x"''' represents the version of TCT and can differ depending on the installation file you have; 
#Make sure that the publisher is '''TELTONIKA TELEMATICS;'''
#If everything is correct, please click on''' Run anyway;''' 
#After confirmation the installation setup will start immediately. 

 
 

 

----

===Teltonika COM Driver Installation===

Teltonika COM Driver is a serial communication port driver for Teltonika Telematics device, It is one of the requirements for TCT to work properly, without this driver TCT will not detect your Teltonika Telematics device.

 Download COM port drivers from Teltonika '''[[Special:Redirect/file/TeltonikaCOMDriver.zip|here]]'''.

Follow the steps below in order to install '''Teltonika COM Driver''' :
# Run '''Teltonika COM_Driver''' with admin privileges' to begin the installation.
#Click the checkbox for '''TELTONIKA COM Driver'''
#Click next and modify/configure the destination folder for installation.
#Click '''Install''' and wait for the progress bar to be completed.
# And finally click '''Close''' to exit the installation. 

===Creating an Offline Configuration File===
In order to create an offline configuration file, follow the steps below:
#Select a device from the list. You can use Search and Filter to find it.
#Click '''Configure''' button.[[File:Offline configuration model selection.png|none|thumb|759x759px]]
#Make configuration and save it by click on '''Save to file''' button.[[File:Save to file2.png|none|thumb]] 

===Creating an Online Configuration File===
In order to create an online configuration file, follow the steps below:

#Make sure that your device is supported by TCT by checking [[Telematics Configuration Tool (TCT)|Supported Devices list]].
#Connect your device to PC.
# In TCT device will appear on '''Discovered devices''' list click there '''Configure''' button.[[File:Configure discovered devices2.png|none|thumb|759x759px]]
#Configure device and save the changes made to device by click on '''Save to device''' button.[[File:Save to device2.png|none|thumb]] 

===Editing a Configuration File===
In order to open an existing configuration file, follow the steps below:

#In offline configuration section click on '''Open''' button.
#Select the configuration file and click''' Open''' [[File:Selected device.png|none|thumb|759x759px]]
#Wait for the configuration file to load, edit it and save the changes made by click on '''Save to file''' button.[[File:Save to file2.png|none|thumb]] 

=== Loading a Configuration File ===
Configuration file can be loaded using '''Open''' button on the start-up screen of TCT or using '''Upload file''' button once you selected a device.

===Differences between Offline and Online Configuration===

Offline configuration refers to creating a configuration without any device connected. Later you can load this configuration file created in offline mode into the device remotely (via [[FOTA WEB|'''FOTA WEB''']]) or when a device is connected to your PC. On the other hand, Online Configuration refers to creating a configuration with a device connected and you can directly save the changes into the device.

===User keys===
User key functionality grants access to exclusive features, including additional functionalities and specialized firmware support.

To enter or view user keys, go to '''Settings''' and select '''User keys''' (functionality is available from the TCT version 2.0.10).
[[File:Entering the TCT User Key example.png|left|thumb]]
 
 

A new modal will open. Then copy '''the full key text from "BEGIN TCT KEY" to "END TCT KEY"''' and paste in '''Add new key field''', then press '''Add key''':
[[File:Entering tct user key examaple.png|alt=Entering the TCT User Key example|thumb|left|724x724px]]

 Once the '''TCT User Key''' is added, you may '''restart''' the TCT. If the Key unlocks '''experimental''' firmware, a new option will appear under the '''Settings''' menu:
[[File:Entering the TCT User Key example experimental firmware.png|alt=Entering the TCT User Key example experimental firmware|thumb|left|724x724px]]

 
 

Click on '''Select Firmware''', a new modal will open. Select the experimental firmware from the dropdown menu and click '''Apply'''. You will then be able to configure the device using experimental firmware.

[[File:Entering the TCT User Key example experimental firmware selection.png|left|thumb|alt=Entering the TCT User Key example experimental firmware selection|350x350px]]
 
 
 

'''''IMPORTANT NOTES'''''
*TCT User Keys have an expiration date.
*User keys are available only in TCT desktop version.
*In order to use User keys functionality you need a PC with an internet connection that can access:
**'''Domain:''' <nowiki>https://cdn.tct.teltonika.lt</nowiki>
**'''Port:''' 443 (https)

==Launching TCT web version==

===Supported web browsers===
Supported TCT WEB browsers are Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari.

We recommend using the latest version of your browser.

===Start up guide===
Follow the steps below in order to start using TCT:

#Open FOTA WEB in your browser. FOTA WEB link: ''https://fota.teltonika.lt/''
# Log in to the FOTA web using your login details.
#Click on '''TCT web''' button on FOTA WEB side navigation.
#Choose to '''Create''' a new configuration or '''Edit''' an existing file from FOTA WEB.[[File:Open TCT web version.png|thumb|alt=|none]]
#Once '''Create''' button is pressed or file selected and '''Edit > Continue''' buttons is pressed, it will open a new browser tab with TCT. 

[[File:TCT main window.png|thumb|761x761px|alt=|none]]

===Creating an Offline Configuration File===
In order to create an offline configuration file, follow the steps below:
#Select a device from the list.
#Click '''Configure''' button.
[[File:Offline configuration via TCT.png|left|thumb|761x761px]]

 

===Editing a Configuration File===
In order to open an existing configuration file, follow the steps below:

#In offline configuration section click on '''TCT web''' button.
#Select '''Edit''' button.[[File:Open TCT web version.png|thumb|alt=|none]]
#Select the configuration file and click''' Continue''' button.[[File:Editing CFG via FOTA WEB.png|thumb|alt=|none]]
#Wait for the configuration file to load, edit it and save the changes you've made by clicking on '''Save to FOTA WEB''' button.[[File:Save to FOTA WEB.png|thumb|alt=|none]]
# You can choose from '''Full save''' and '''Only changes''' options.[[File:How do you want to save.png|thumb|alt=|none]]
#The needed to edit configuration can also be selected from the '''Files''' tab and changed by selecting '''Edit in TCT web'''.
[[File:Edit in TCT web.png|left|thumb|761x761px]]
 

=== FOTA WEB Configuration Accessibility ===
The TCT WEB configuration is stored in the FOTA WEB cloud under the creator’s company.

All configuration files uploaded to or stored in FOTA WEB are accessible online by authorized users within the company under which they were uploaded or saved.

=== Loading a Configuration File ===
Configuration file can be loaded using '''Open''' button on the start-up screen of TCT or using '''Upload file''' button once you selected a device.

Getting started with TCT

2026-03-03T13:07:51Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Launching TCT web version */

[[Category:Telematics Configuration Tool (TCT)]]
{| align="right"
|__TOC__
|}

This page will provide you with all the necessary information needed to successfully launch the TCT application on your PC for the first time. Moreover, we will cover the different types of configuration files (offline vs online) you can create with the help of TCT.

==Minimum System Requirements==

{| class="wikitable"
|'''OS'''||Windows 10; Windows 11
|-
|'''CPU'''||Intel or AMD processor with 64-bit support
|-
|'''Disk Storage'''||1 GB of free disk space
|-
|'''Memory'''||500 MB of free RAM
|-
|'''Graphics'''||DirectX 9 or later with WDDM 1.0 driver
|-
|'''Internet'''||Ethernet port or Wi-Fi with network access for auto-update
|}

== Important information ==
Before continuing please read information below:

* From TCT '''2.0.0''' onwards, only FT platform devices are supported.
* For TCT '''1.X.XX''' versions auto-update feature doesn't work.

==Launching TCT desktop version==

===TCT Download Link===
Below you can find the installation file for the latest version of TCT:
{| class="wikitable"
! style="width:100px;" | Version
! style="width:100px;" | Upload date
! Link
! Comment
|-
| style="text-align: center;"| '''3.0.30'''
| style="text-align: center;"| 2026-03-02
| [[File:Download_zip.png|x100px|link=https://github.com/teltonika-telematics/tct/releases/download/v3.0.30/TelematicsConfigurationTool.Setup.3.0.30-windows-x86_64bit.zip]]
| The desktop application's underlying framework has been migrated from '''Electron.NET''' to the lightweight '''Photino.NET'''. This change is the primary reason for the major version increment. Installing TCT 3.0.0 or any subsequent version will not automatically remove previous TCT 2.0.X installations. To avoid potential conflicts and reclaim disk space, you must manually uninstall any TCT 2.0.X versions.
|}

----

===Installation guide===
Follow the steps below in order to install TCT on your PC:
#Install TelematicsConfigurationTool.Setup.exe with admin privileges.
#Accept the license agreement.
#Choose whether TCT should be available to all users or just to you (current user).
#Select the location where you want to install TCT. By default, TCT is installed in the program files. However, you can install it anywhere you want.
#Wait until the installation is complete and click '''Finish''' to exit installation wizard.
----
'''Information below is relevant for TCT version 1.1.80 or older.'''

'''''IMPORTANT NOTES'''''

Windows smart screen may appear during first installation. If this occurs please follow the steps below: [[File:WindowsSmartScreen.png|right|421x421px]]
#Click on '''More info''' to access additional details about the application; 
#Make sure that the application name is '''TelematicsConfigurationTool.Setup.x.x.x.exe.''' Take into account that '''"x"''' represents the version of TCT and can differ depending on the installation file you have; 
#Make sure that the publisher is '''TELTONIKA TELEMATICS;'''
#If everything is correct, please click on''' Run anyway;''' 
#After confirmation the installation setup will start immediately. 

 
 

 

----

===Teltonika COM Driver Installation===

Teltonika COM Driver is a serial communication port driver for Teltonika Telematics device, It is one of the requirements for TCT to work properly, without this driver TCT will not detect your Teltonika Telematics device.

 Download COM port drivers from Teltonika '''[[Special:Redirect/file/TeltonikaCOMDriver.zip|here]]'''.

Follow the steps below in order to install '''Teltonika COM Driver''' :
# Run '''Teltonika COM_Driver''' with admin privileges' to begin the installation.
#Click the checkbox for '''TELTONIKA COM Driver'''
#Click next and modify/configure the destination folder for installation.
#Click '''Install''' and wait for the progress bar to be completed.
# And finally click '''Close''' to exit the installation. 

===Creating an Offline Configuration File===
In order to create an offline configuration file, follow the steps below:
#Select a device from the list. You can use Search and Filter to find it.
#Click '''Configure''' button.[[File:Offline configuration model selection.png|none|thumb|759x759px]]
#Make configuration and save it by click on '''Save to file''' button.[[File:Save to file2.png|none|thumb]] 

===Creating an Online Configuration File===
In order to create an online configuration file, follow the steps below:

#Make sure that your device is supported by TCT by checking [[Telematics Configuration Tool (TCT)|Supported Devices list]].
#Connect your device to PC.
# In TCT device will appear on '''Discovered devices''' list click there '''Configure''' button.[[File:Configure discovered devices2.png|none|thumb|759x759px]]
#Configure device and save the changes made to device by click on '''Save to device''' button.[[File:Save to device2.png|none|thumb]] 

===Editing a Configuration File===
In order to open an existing configuration file, follow the steps below:

#In offline configuration section click on '''Open''' button.
#Select the configuration file and click''' Open''' [[File:Selected device.png|none|thumb|759x759px]]
#Wait for the configuration file to load, edit it and save the changes made by click on '''Save to file''' button.[[File:Save to file2.png|none|thumb]] 

=== Loading a Configuration File ===
Configuration file can be loaded using '''Open''' button on the start-up screen of TCT or using '''Upload file''' button once you selected a device.

===Differences between Offline and Online Configuration===

Offline configuration refers to creating a configuration without any device connected. Later you can load this configuration file created in offline mode into the device remotely (via [[FOTA WEB|'''FOTA WEB''']]) or when a device is connected to your PC. On the other hand, Online Configuration refers to creating a configuration with a device connected and you can directly save the changes into the device.

===User keys===
User key functionality grants access to exclusive features, including additional functionalities and specialized firmware support.

To enter or view user keys, go to '''Settings''' and select '''User keys''' (functionality is available from the TCT version 2.0.10).
[[File:Entering the TCT User Key example.png|left|thumb]]
 
 

A new modal will open. Then copy '''the full key text from "BEGIN TCT KEY" to "END TCT KEY"''' and paste in '''Add new key field''', then press '''Add key''':
[[File:Entering tct user key examaple.png|alt=Entering the TCT User Key example|thumb|left|724x724px]]

 Once the '''TCT User Key''' is added, you may '''restart''' the TCT. If the Key unlocks '''experimental''' firmware, a new option will appear under the '''Settings''' menu:
[[File:Entering the TCT User Key example experimental firmware.png|alt=Entering the TCT User Key example experimental firmware|thumb|left|724x724px]]

 
 

Click on '''Select Firmware''', a new modal will open. Select the experimental firmware from the dropdown menu and click '''Apply'''. You will then be able to configure the device using experimental firmware.

[[File:Entering the TCT User Key example experimental firmware selection.png|left|thumb|alt=Entering the TCT User Key example experimental firmware selection|350x350px]]
 
 
 

'''''IMPORTANT NOTES'''''
*TCT User Keys have an expiration date.
*User keys are available only in TCT desktop version.
*In order to use User keys functionality you need a PC with an internet connection that can access:
**'''Domain:''' <nowiki>https://cdn.tct.teltonika.lt</nowiki>
**'''Port:''' 443 (https)

==Launching TCT web version==

===Supported web browsers===
Supported TCT WEB browsers are Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari.

We recommend using the latest version of your browser.

===Start up guide===
Follow the steps below in order to start using TCT:

#Open FOTA WEB in your browser. FOTA WEB link: ''https://fota.teltonika.lt/''
# Log in to the FOTA web using your login details.
#Click on '''TCT web''' button on FOTA WEB side navigation.
#Choose to '''Create''' a new configuration or '''Edit''' an existing file from FOTA WEB.[[File:Open TCT web version.png|thumb|alt=|none]]
#Once '''Create''' button is pressed or file selected and '''Edit > Continue''' buttons is pressed, it will open a new browser tab with TCT. 

[[File:TCT main window.png|thumb|761x761px|alt=|none]]

===Creating an Offline Configuration File===
In order to create an offline configuration file, follow the steps below:
#Select a device from the list.
#Click '''Configure''' button.
[[File:Offline configuration via TCT.png|left|thumb|761x761px]]

 

===Editing a Configuration File===
In order to open an existing configuration file, follow the steps below:

#In offline configuration section click on '''TCT web''' button.
#Select '''Edit''' button.[[File:Open TCT web version.png|thumb|alt=|none]]
#Select the configuration file and click''' Continue''' button.[[File:Editing CFG via FOTA WEB.png|thumb|alt=|none]]
#Wait for the configuration file to load, edit it and save the changes you've made by clicking on '''Save to FOTA WEB''' button.[[File:Save to FOTA WEB.png|thumb|alt=|none]]
# You can choose from '''Full save''' and '''Only changes''' options.[[File:How do you want to save.png|thumb|alt=|none]]
#The needed to edit configuration can also be selected from the '''Files''' tab and changed by selecting '''Edit in TCT web'''.
[[File:Edit in TCT web.png|left|thumb|761x761px]]
 

=== FOTA WEB Configuration Accessibility ===
The TCT WEB configuration is stored in the FOTA WEB cloud under the creator’s company.
All configuration files uploaded to or stored in FOTA WEB are accessible online by authorized users within the company under which they were uploaded or saved.

=== Loading a Configuration File ===
Configuration file can be loaded using '''Open''' button on the start-up screen of TCT or using '''Upload file''' button once you selected a device.

FOTA WEB Users

2026-02-17T13:04:28Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Invitations */

__TOC__

This chapter is an overview of '''USERS''' menu.

=='''Users section'''==

The users tab is used to invite new users, manage existing users on your parent and child companies, and manage user roles and permissions.
[[File:User4.png|thumb|1105x1105px|Users page|left]]

Below you shall find an explanation of what each column means.

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''EMAIL''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: email 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | This is the email that has been used for User invitation. 
'''NOTE:''' you can not have more than one User bound to the same email address. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''ID''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: User ID 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | The unique user ID 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |
'''ROLE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |
String: Role
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |
The role(s) that is assigned to the user.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: Company name 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | User can belong to the '''root''' level company or a '''child''' company. 
For Company and User hierarchy refer to [[FOTA WEB Companies#COMPANY STRUCTURE|'''Companies''']]. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''INVITED BY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: email 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | This is the user email that created the invitation. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''LAST SIGN IN''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: date 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This is the date that a User last signed into an account. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: date 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This is the date that a User accepted invitation thus creating an account. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: date 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This is the date that a User was active on his account. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''STATUS''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: user status 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This is the user activation status and validity term. 
|}

=== '''User status''' ===
User status indicates the state of user. Possible user statuses:

* '''"Active"''' - Users who accepted the invitation and expiration date if set.
* "'''Inactive'''" - Users who have their access terminated with a date of termination.
* '''"Invitation pending"''' - Users with a pending invitation.
* "'''Invitation expired'''" - Users with an expired invitation.

==='''User details'''===
Clicking on the selected user opens more information about the user. "User details" tab displays the information: Email, last sign in, user ID, assigned role, creation date, and last updated date.[[File:User details2.png|none|thumb|650x650px]]

==='''Permissions info'''===
Clicking on the selected user opens more information about roles and permissions. The list of granted user roles and their permissions can be viewed under the "Permissions info" tab.
[[File:User permisions list2.png|none|thumb|650x650px]]

=='''Invitations'''==

Inviting a new user requires to fill in mandatory fields:

* '''Email''' - invitee's email address.
* '''Company''' - company where user will be invited to.
* '''Role''' '''(s)''' - role or roles to which user will be assigned.
* '''Expiration date''' (optional) - expiration date when access will be terminated.
[[File:User invite5.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]

In the Users tab, you can view and manage invitations that have already been sent out.

[[File:User invite2.png|none|thumb|1105x1105px]]

There are 2 available actions for the invitations which are RESEND THE INVITATION and CANCEL INVITATION. Both options can be found on the right side of the screen.

'''NOTE:''' The user invitation is valid for 30 days. If it is not used, you will need to send a new one.

== '''User Expiration''' ==

The user expiration feature allows administrators to define a specific lifespan for any user account. Once the expiration date is reached, the system automatically revokes the user's login privileges.

=== Invitation phase ===
When inviting a new user, a new optional field '''"Expiration date"''' is available in the invitation modal.

* If left blank, the user will have indefinite access.
* If a date is selected, the user’s account will automatically move to the '''Expired''' state at 00:00:00 (user local time) on the day following the selected date.

=== Editing active users ===
Administrators can retroactively apply, change, or remove expiration dates for existing users via the '''User Edit''' modal.

* Setting a date will result in setting expiration date for already active user.
* Removing a date restores the account to indefinite access.

=== Manual termination & reactivation ===
The system now supports manual "Kill Switch" functionality:

* '''Immediate access termination:''' Revokes access immediately, regardless of any set expiration date. The account status changes to '''Inactive'''.
* '''Reactivation:''' Allows an administrator to restore access to an inactive user. Upon reactivation, the admin must specify if the new access is:
** '''Indefinite''' (no expiration date).
** '''Temporary''' (new expiration date required).

=== Notifications ===
FOTA WEB triggers automated email notifications to the user to ensure transparency and prevent unexpected lockouts.

* '''Before expiration''' - triggered when expiration date is less than 7 days.
* '''On expiration''' - triggered at the exact moment the account state changes to '''Inactive.'''
* '''On reactivation''' - triggered immediately when access is restored.

== '''User deletion''' ==

The Delete pop up button is used for deleting existing users under your companies.

These are the steps to delete existing users:
 
1. Check users that you would like to delete
[[File:Detele user3.png|none|thumb|750x750px]]
2. Click on Delete. 
3. Make sure you have selected the correct users. 
4. Click on Delete.
[[File:Delete user2.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]

'''NOTE:''' Deleted users cannot be restored. 

== '''Roles and Permissions section''' ==

==='''Role functionality description'''===

A role defines a set of permissions for a user, and one user can have up to 5 roles. Permission is specific actions within the FOTA WEB. e.g., "Create task," "Invite user", "Upload files“. Roles belong to a specific company and are not inherited by child/parent companies. When moving a user to a different company, at least one role must be set. When merging companies, custom roles will be moved to the target company. You may want to review assigned roles before merging. The role can be deleted if no users or invitations are assigned.

The list of available Role permissions can be viewed by hovering the mouse over the "Permissions count" in the "Roles and Permissions" section in the "Users" page.

[[File:Permisions2.png|none|thumb|750x750px]]

==='''Static roles'''===
To improve security and ensure more efficient work distribution in FOTA WEB, static user roles with specific permissions were added. Static roles cannot be edited or deleted.

List of Static roles:

* '''Administrator''' – Have full control over all features/permissions.
* '''User''' – Have access to the most common features.
* '''Guest''' – Have read-only access and cannot perform any actions.

[[File:Role names2.png|none|thumb|750x750px]]

Automatically invited users have "Administrator" role assigned.

==='''Custom roles'''===
A custom role is a manually created role that can include '''any combination''' of the available permissions. This feature is available for '''Premium company level''' in FOTA WEB. Custom user roles can be created, edited, or deleted only by users with Administrator or Custom roles with appropriate permissions.

To create a custom role, click on “Create role“ button:
[[File:Create Role.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]

When creating a role, the following information must be provided:

* '''Role name''' - your custom role name.
* '''Company''' - a company for which a custom role will be created.
* '''Description''' (optional) - description of a custom role.
* '''Permission preset''' (optional) - predefined role templates can be used as a starting point for creating custom roles
* '''List of permissions'''

[[File:Permisions list2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]

Available permissions are categorized into groups to better separate actions that can be controlled by permissions. Currently available categories:

* '''Devices''' - actions related to devices, such as "Device export".
* '''Tasks''' - actions related to single tasks, such as "Task create".
* '''Task groups''' - actions related to task groups, such as "Task group read".
* '''Device groups''' - actions related to device groups, such as "Device group create".
* '''Files''' - actions related to files, such as "File upload".
* '''Companies''' - actions related to companies and their management, such as "Company merge".
* '''Users''' - actions related to users and their management, such as "User invite".
* '''Roles''' - actions related to newly added roles, such as custom "Role create".
* '''Tokens''' - actions related to integrations and API, such as "TCT token".

=='''Role deletion'''==

The role can be deleted if no users or invitations are assigned. The '''Delete''' button is used for deleting a custom role: 
1. Check the role that you would like to delete.
[[File:Delete role3.png|none|thumb|750x750px]]
2. Click on '''Delete'''. 
3. Make sure you have selected the correct role. 
4. Click on '''Delete'''.
[[File:Roles delete3.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]
'''NOTE:''' Only custom roles can be deleted, and they cannot be restored after deletion. 

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Users

2026-02-17T13:03:47Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Invitations */

__TOC__

This chapter is an overview of '''USERS''' menu.

=='''Users section'''==

The users tab is used to invite new users, manage existing users on your parent and child companies, and manage user roles and permissions.
[[File:User4.png|thumb|1105x1105px|Users page|left]]

Below you shall find an explanation of what each column means.

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''EMAIL''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: email 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | This is the email that has been used for User invitation. 
'''NOTE:''' you can not have more than one User bound to the same email address. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''ID''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: User ID 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | The unique user ID 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |
'''ROLE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |
String: Role
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |
The role(s) that is assigned to the user.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: Company name 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | User can belong to the '''root''' level company or a '''child''' company. 
For Company and User hierarchy refer to [[FOTA WEB Companies#COMPANY STRUCTURE|'''Companies''']]. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''INVITED BY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: email 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | This is the user email that created the invitation. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''LAST SIGN IN''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: date 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This is the date that a User last signed into an account. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: date 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This is the date that a User accepted invitation thus creating an account. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: date 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This is the date that a User was active on his account. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''STATUS''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | String: user status 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This is the user activation status and validity term. 
|}

=== '''User status''' ===
User status indicates the state of user. Possible user statuses:

* '''"Active"''' - Users who accepted the invitation and expiration date if set.
* "'''Inactive'''" - Users who have their access terminated with a date of termination.
* '''"Invitation pending"''' - Users with a pending invitation.
* "'''Invitation expired'''" - Users with an expired invitation.

==='''User details'''===
Clicking on the selected user opens more information about the user. "User details" tab displays the information: Email, last sign in, user ID, assigned role, creation date, and last updated date.[[File:User details2.png|none|thumb|650x650px]]

==='''Permissions info'''===
Clicking on the selected user opens more information about roles and permissions. The list of granted user roles and their permissions can be viewed under the "Permissions info" tab.
[[File:User permisions list2.png|none|thumb|650x650px]]

=='''Invitations'''==

Inviting a new user requires to fill in mandatory fields:

* '''Email''' - invitee's email address.
* '''Company''' - company where user will be invited to.
* '''Role''' '''(s)''' - role or roles to which user will be assigned.
* '''Expiration date''' (optional) - expiration date when access will be terminated.
[[File:User invite5.png|thumb]]
[[File:User Invite2.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]

In the Users tab, you can view and manage invitations that have already been sent out.

[[File:User invite2.png|none|thumb|1105x1105px]]

There are 2 available actions for the invitations which are RESEND THE INVITATION and CANCEL INVITATION. Both options can be found on the right side of the screen.

'''NOTE:''' The user invitation is valid for 30 days. If it is not used, you will need to send a new one.

== '''User Expiration''' ==

The user expiration feature allows administrators to define a specific lifespan for any user account. Once the expiration date is reached, the system automatically revokes the user's login privileges.

=== Invitation phase ===
When inviting a new user, a new optional field '''"Expiration date"''' is available in the invitation modal.

* If left blank, the user will have indefinite access.
* If a date is selected, the user’s account will automatically move to the '''Expired''' state at 00:00:00 (user local time) on the day following the selected date.

=== Editing active users ===
Administrators can retroactively apply, change, or remove expiration dates for existing users via the '''User Edit''' modal.

* Setting a date will result in setting expiration date for already active user.
* Removing a date restores the account to indefinite access.

=== Manual termination & reactivation ===
The system now supports manual "Kill Switch" functionality:

* '''Immediate access termination:''' Revokes access immediately, regardless of any set expiration date. The account status changes to '''Inactive'''.
* '''Reactivation:''' Allows an administrator to restore access to an inactive user. Upon reactivation, the admin must specify if the new access is:
** '''Indefinite''' (no expiration date).
** '''Temporary''' (new expiration date required).

=== Notifications ===
FOTA WEB triggers automated email notifications to the user to ensure transparency and prevent unexpected lockouts.

* '''Before expiration''' - triggered when expiration date is less than 7 days.
* '''On expiration''' - triggered at the exact moment the account state changes to '''Inactive.'''
* '''On reactivation''' - triggered immediately when access is restored.

== '''User deletion''' ==

The Delete pop up button is used for deleting existing users under your companies.

These are the steps to delete existing users:
 
1. Check users that you would like to delete
[[File:Detele user3.png|none|thumb|750x750px]]
2. Click on Delete. 
3. Make sure you have selected the correct users. 
4. Click on Delete.
[[File:Delete user2.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]

'''NOTE:''' Deleted users cannot be restored. 

== '''Roles and Permissions section''' ==

==='''Role functionality description'''===

A role defines a set of permissions for a user, and one user can have up to 5 roles. Permission is specific actions within the FOTA WEB. e.g., "Create task," "Invite user", "Upload files“. Roles belong to a specific company and are not inherited by child/parent companies. When moving a user to a different company, at least one role must be set. When merging companies, custom roles will be moved to the target company. You may want to review assigned roles before merging. The role can be deleted if no users or invitations are assigned.

The list of available Role permissions can be viewed by hovering the mouse over the "Permissions count" in the "Roles and Permissions" section in the "Users" page.

[[File:Permisions2.png|none|thumb|750x750px]]

==='''Static roles'''===
To improve security and ensure more efficient work distribution in FOTA WEB, static user roles with specific permissions were added. Static roles cannot be edited or deleted.

List of Static roles:

* '''Administrator''' – Have full control over all features/permissions.
* '''User''' – Have access to the most common features.
* '''Guest''' – Have read-only access and cannot perform any actions.

[[File:Role names2.png|none|thumb|750x750px]]

Automatically invited users have "Administrator" role assigned.

==='''Custom roles'''===
A custom role is a manually created role that can include '''any combination''' of the available permissions. This feature is available for '''Premium company level''' in FOTA WEB. Custom user roles can be created, edited, or deleted only by users with Administrator or Custom roles with appropriate permissions.

To create a custom role, click on “Create role“ button:
[[File:Create Role.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]

When creating a role, the following information must be provided:

* '''Role name''' - your custom role name.
* '''Company''' - a company for which a custom role will be created.
* '''Description''' (optional) - description of a custom role.
* '''Permission preset''' (optional) - predefined role templates can be used as a starting point for creating custom roles
* '''List of permissions'''

[[File:Permisions list2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]

Available permissions are categorized into groups to better separate actions that can be controlled by permissions. Currently available categories:

* '''Devices''' - actions related to devices, such as "Device export".
* '''Tasks''' - actions related to single tasks, such as "Task create".
* '''Task groups''' - actions related to task groups, such as "Task group read".
* '''Device groups''' - actions related to device groups, such as "Device group create".
* '''Files''' - actions related to files, such as "File upload".
* '''Companies''' - actions related to companies and their management, such as "Company merge".
* '''Users''' - actions related to users and their management, such as "User invite".
* '''Roles''' - actions related to newly added roles, such as custom "Role create".
* '''Tokens''' - actions related to integrations and API, such as "TCT token".

=='''Role deletion'''==

The role can be deleted if no users or invitations are assigned. The '''Delete''' button is used for deleting a custom role: 
1. Check the role that you would like to delete.
[[File:Delete role3.png|none|thumb|750x750px]]
2. Click on '''Delete'''. 
3. Make sure you have selected the correct role. 
4. Click on '''Delete'''.
[[File:Roles delete3.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]
'''NOTE:''' Only custom roles can be deleted, and they cannot be restored after deletion. 

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

File:User invite5.png

2026-02-17T13:03:39Z

Andrius.Grajevskis:

User invite5

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:48:37Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Device transfer */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 
 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:48:01Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Device transfer */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 
 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:47:31Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Device transfer */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 
 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:46:07Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Device transfer */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 
 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:45:38Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Export */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 
 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:45:14Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Export */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 
 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:44:26Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Search */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 
 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:43:38Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Scheduled tasks */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:43:11Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Move */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:42:49Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Move */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:42:25Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Move */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:42:04Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Move */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:41:16Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Create Task */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:40:30Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Export */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:39:51Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Scheduled tasks */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:39:17Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Scheduled tasks */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-02-17T12:37:55Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Search */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 
4. ICCID. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

File:Task groups5.png

2026-01-23T13:37:04Z

Andrius.Grajevskis:

Task groups5

File:Smart group6.png

2026-01-21T13:46:11Z

Andrius.Grajevskis:

Smart group6

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-21T09:30:34Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Device Area */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decommissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Getting Started API

2026-01-14T14:43:36Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Creating API token */

__TOC__

=='''API introduction'''==

The FOTA WEB API allows you to integrate system functions into your own application. If you already have a user account in FOTA WEB, you automatically have access to the API! What can you do with the API? You can implement any feature available in our WEB UI, and even more, into your own application. For example, if you have fleet management software and want to create configuration updates, you can! If you need to set firmware updates, you can also do that!

=='''Getting Started API'''==

=== How to start using FOTA WEB API. You will find all of the API documentation at ===
'''https://api.teltonika.lt/documents/'''

=== To be able to use API you will need to have token===
Token will be key for your access. It can be created over FOTA WEB UI '''https://fota.teltonika.lt'''

=='''Creating API token'''==
'''Step 1.''' To create token Login to '''https://fota.teltonika.lt'''
 
'''Step 2.''' Go to the top right corner and find '''API Tokens''' in the '''Settings'''.
[[Image:FOTA settings3.png|300px|left]]
 
'''Step 3.''' Next, click the '''Add Token''' button.
[[File:API tokens3.png|thumb|left]]
 
'''Step 4.''' Choose '''Token type>>API integration token''', write '''Token name''', and press '''Generate''' button.
[[Image:API tokens4.png|300px|left]]
 
'''Step 5.''' After the token is generated, copy it by clicking the copy button or by manually selecting and copying it.
[[Image:API token6.png|
[[File:Generated API token.png|thumb]]550|left]]
 
 
'''Important!''' After you close the window you will not be able to check Token again. For security, the Token is not saved to the system. If you lose your token or delete an existing one, you will have to create a new one.

=='''FOTA Web API changelog'''==

Here is information on the latest changes to the FOTA Web API

=== 2025-09-24 ===
All "role" properties were removed from API requests and responses.

=== 2025-07-02 ===
POST /tasks/bulkCancel endpoint changes:

* POST /tasks/bulkCancel endpoint no longer accepts "id" filter in the "filter" type source requests. Instead, "id_list" source should be used and provide a list of task IDs.

GET /tasks endpoint changes:

* GET /tasks endpoint now allows to retrieve multiple tasks in a single request by passing a comma-separated list of task IDs via the id query parameter. Request example: GET /tasks?id=1,2,3

===2025-06-10===

Query parameter "company_id" is removed from GET /batches/{batchId}. This means that batch.task_stats will no longer be filtered by provided "company_id" and will always be calculated from all batch tasks which can be viewed by the user.

===2024-06-28===

Endpoint to select several IMEI's was added. Request example: GET /devices?imei=123,123,123,123,123,....&per_page=100&page=23

===2024-03-01===

Message field is being moved from task attributes to separate field. Message from attributes will be removed on 2024-03-01.

===2023-10-19===

Datetime format inside device export files was unified to yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss.

===2023-09-07===

Separate endpoint for bulk tasks cancellation was added. Endpoint: /tasks/bulkCancel.

===2023-08-16===

Separate endpoint for retry failed tasks in a task group was added. Endpoint: /batches/{batchId}/retryFailedTasks.

===2023-06-30===

Removed company statistics from GET /companies/<ID> response:

* `device_count`
* `user_count`
* `file_count`
* `group_count`
* `task_count`
* `company_count`

This data can still be accessed via dedicated endpoint GET /companies/stats?company_id=<ID>

===2023-04-05===

Removed device properties:
* `status_id`
* `status_name`

These properties are replaced by `activity_status` and `task_queue` that were introduced on 2022-12-20.

===2022-12-20===

Added new device properties:
* `activity_status`
* `task_queue`

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Account_Settings'''Account Settings'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Company_levels '''FOTA Company levels''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Getting Started API

2026-01-14T14:36:52Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Creating API token */

__TOC__

=='''API introduction'''==

The FOTA WEB API allows you to integrate system functions into your own application. If you already have a user account in FOTA WEB, you automatically have access to the API! What can you do with the API? You can implement any feature available in our WEB UI, and even more, into your own application. For example, if you have fleet management software and want to create configuration updates, you can! If you need to set firmware updates, you can also do that!

=='''Getting Started API'''==

=== How to start using FOTA WEB API. You will find all of the API documentation at ===
'''https://api.teltonika.lt/documents/'''

=== To be able to use API you will need to have token===
Token will be key for your access. It can be created over FOTA WEB UI '''https://fota.teltonika.lt'''

=='''Creating API token'''==
'''Step 1.''' To create token Login to '''https://fota.teltonika.lt'''
 
'''Step 2.''' Go to the top right corner and find '''API Tokens''' in the '''Settings'''.
[[Image:FOTA settings3.png|300px|left]]
 
'''Step 3.''' Next, click the '''Add Token''' button.
[[File:API tokens3.png|thumb|left]]
 
'''Step 4.''' Choose '''Token type>>API integration token''', write '''Token name''', and press '''Generate''' button.
[[Image:Generate API tokens.png|300px|left]]

 

[[File:API tokens4.png|thumb]]
 
'''Step 5.''' After the token is generated, copy it by clicking the copy button or by manually selecting and copying it.
[[Image:Generated API token.png|
[[File:Generated API token.png|thumb]]550|left]]
 
[[File:API token6.png|thumb]]
 
'''Important!''' After you close the window you will not be able to check Token again. For security, the Token is not saved to the system. If you lose your token or delete an existing one, you will have to create a new one.

=='''FOTA Web API changelog'''==

Here is information on the latest changes to the FOTA Web API

=== 2025-09-24 ===
All "role" properties were removed from API requests and responses.

=== 2025-07-02 ===
POST /tasks/bulkCancel endpoint changes:

* POST /tasks/bulkCancel endpoint no longer accepts "id" filter in the "filter" type source requests. Instead, "id_list" source should be used and provide a list of task IDs.

GET /tasks endpoint changes:

* GET /tasks endpoint now allows to retrieve multiple tasks in a single request by passing a comma-separated list of task IDs via the id query parameter. Request example: GET /tasks?id=1,2,3

===2025-06-10===

Query parameter "company_id" is removed from GET /batches/{batchId}. This means that batch.task_stats will no longer be filtered by provided "company_id" and will always be calculated from all batch tasks which can be viewed by the user.

===2024-06-28===

Endpoint to select several IMEI's was added. Request example: GET /devices?imei=123,123,123,123,123,....&per_page=100&page=23

===2024-03-01===

Message field is being moved from task attributes to separate field. Message from attributes will be removed on 2024-03-01.

===2023-10-19===

Datetime format inside device export files was unified to yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss.

===2023-09-07===

Separate endpoint for bulk tasks cancellation was added. Endpoint: /tasks/bulkCancel.

===2023-08-16===

Separate endpoint for retry failed tasks in a task group was added. Endpoint: /batches/{batchId}/retryFailedTasks.

===2023-06-30===

Removed company statistics from GET /companies/<ID> response:

* `device_count`
* `user_count`
* `file_count`
* `group_count`
* `task_count`
* `company_count`

This data can still be accessed via dedicated endpoint GET /companies/stats?company_id=<ID>

===2023-04-05===

Removed device properties:
* `status_id`
* `status_name`

These properties are replaced by `activity_status` and `task_queue` that were introduced on 2022-12-20.

===2022-12-20===

Added new device properties:
* `activity_status`
* `task_queue`

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Account_Settings'''Account Settings'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Company_levels '''FOTA Company levels''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

File:API token6.png

2026-01-14T14:36:45Z

Andrius.Grajevskis:

API token6

File:API tokens4.png

2026-01-14T14:28:24Z

Andrius.Grajevskis:

API tokens4

FOTA WEB Getting Started API

2026-01-14T14:16:37Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Creating API token */

__TOC__

=='''API introduction'''==

The FOTA WEB API allows you to integrate system functions into your own application. If you already have a user account in FOTA WEB, you automatically have access to the API! What can you do with the API? You can implement any feature available in our WEB UI, and even more, into your own application. For example, if you have fleet management software and want to create configuration updates, you can! If you need to set firmware updates, you can also do that!

=='''Getting Started API'''==

=== How to start using FOTA WEB API. You will find all of the API documentation at ===
'''https://api.teltonika.lt/documents/'''

=== To be able to use API you will need to have token===
Token will be key for your access. It can be created over FOTA WEB UI '''https://fota.teltonika.lt'''

=='''Creating API token'''==
'''Step 1.''' To create token Login to '''https://fota.teltonika.lt'''
 
'''Step 2.''' Go to the top right corner and find '''API Tokens''' in the '''Settings'''.
[[Image:FOTA settings3.png|300px|left]]
 
'''Step 3.''' Next, click the '''Add Token''' button.
[[File:API tokens3.png|thumb|left]]
 
'''Step 4.''' Choose '''Token type>>API integration token''', write '''Token name''', and press '''Generate''' button.
[[Image:Generate API tokens.png|300px|left]]

 
'''Step 5.''' After the token is generated, copy it by clicking the copy button or by manually selecting and copying it.
[[Image:Generated API token.png|
[[File:Generated API token.png|thumb]]550|left]]
 
'''Important!''' After you close the window you will not be able to check Token again. For security, the Token is not saved to the system. If you lose your token or delete an existing one, you will have to create a new one.

=='''FOTA Web API changelog'''==

Here is information on the latest changes to the FOTA Web API

=== 2025-09-24 ===
All "role" properties were removed from API requests and responses.

=== 2025-07-02 ===
POST /tasks/bulkCancel endpoint changes:

* POST /tasks/bulkCancel endpoint no longer accepts "id" filter in the "filter" type source requests. Instead, "id_list" source should be used and provide a list of task IDs.

GET /tasks endpoint changes:

* GET /tasks endpoint now allows to retrieve multiple tasks in a single request by passing a comma-separated list of task IDs via the id query parameter. Request example: GET /tasks?id=1,2,3

===2025-06-10===

Query parameter "company_id" is removed from GET /batches/{batchId}. This means that batch.task_stats will no longer be filtered by provided "company_id" and will always be calculated from all batch tasks which can be viewed by the user.

===2024-06-28===

Endpoint to select several IMEI's was added. Request example: GET /devices?imei=123,123,123,123,123,....&per_page=100&page=23

===2024-03-01===

Message field is being moved from task attributes to separate field. Message from attributes will be removed on 2024-03-01.

===2023-10-19===

Datetime format inside device export files was unified to yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss.

===2023-09-07===

Separate endpoint for bulk tasks cancellation was added. Endpoint: /tasks/bulkCancel.

===2023-08-16===

Separate endpoint for retry failed tasks in a task group was added. Endpoint: /batches/{batchId}/retryFailedTasks.

===2023-06-30===

Removed company statistics from GET /companies/<ID> response:

* `device_count`
* `user_count`
* `file_count`
* `group_count`
* `task_count`
* `company_count`

This data can still be accessed via dedicated endpoint GET /companies/stats?company_id=<ID>

===2023-04-05===

Removed device properties:
* `status_id`
* `status_name`

These properties are replaced by `activity_status` and `task_queue` that were introduced on 2022-12-20.

===2022-12-20===

Added new device properties:
* `activity_status`
* `task_queue`

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Account_Settings'''Account Settings'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Company_levels '''FOTA Company levels''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Getting Started API

2026-01-14T14:14:12Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Creating API token */

__TOC__

=='''API introduction'''==

The FOTA WEB API allows you to integrate system functions into your own application. If you already have a user account in FOTA WEB, you automatically have access to the API! What can you do with the API? You can implement any feature available in our WEB UI, and even more, into your own application. For example, if you have fleet management software and want to create configuration updates, you can! If you need to set firmware updates, you can also do that!

=='''Getting Started API'''==

=== How to start using FOTA WEB API. You will find all of the API documentation at ===
'''https://api.teltonika.lt/documents/'''

=== To be able to use API you will need to have token===
Token will be key for your access. It can be created over FOTA WEB UI '''https://fota.teltonika.lt'''

=='''Creating API token'''==
'''Step 1.''' To create token Login to '''https://fota.teltonika.lt'''
 
'''Step 2.''' Go to the top right corner and find '''API Tokens''' in the '''Settings'''.
[[Image:FOTA settings3.png|300px|left]]
 
'''Step 3.''' Next, click the '''Add Token''' button.
[[File:API tokens1.png|thumb|left]]
 
[[File:API tokens3.png|thumb]]
 
'''Step 4.''' Choose '''Token type>>API integration token''', write '''Token name''', and press '''Generate''' button.
[[Image:Generate API tokens.png|300px|left]]

 
'''Step 5.''' After the token is generated, copy it by clicking the copy button or by manually selecting and copying it.
[[Image:Generated API token.png|
[[File:Generated API token.png|thumb]]550|left]]
 
'''Important!''' After you close the window you will not be able to check Token again. For security, the Token is not saved to the system. If you lose your token or delete an existing one, you will have to create a new one.

=='''FOTA Web API changelog'''==

Here is information on the latest changes to the FOTA Web API

=== 2025-09-24 ===
All "role" properties were removed from API requests and responses.

=== 2025-07-02 ===
POST /tasks/bulkCancel endpoint changes:

* POST /tasks/bulkCancel endpoint no longer accepts "id" filter in the "filter" type source requests. Instead, "id_list" source should be used and provide a list of task IDs.

GET /tasks endpoint changes:

* GET /tasks endpoint now allows to retrieve multiple tasks in a single request by passing a comma-separated list of task IDs via the id query parameter. Request example: GET /tasks?id=1,2,3

===2025-06-10===

Query parameter "company_id" is removed from GET /batches/{batchId}. This means that batch.task_stats will no longer be filtered by provided "company_id" and will always be calculated from all batch tasks which can be viewed by the user.

===2024-06-28===

Endpoint to select several IMEI's was added. Request example: GET /devices?imei=123,123,123,123,123,....&per_page=100&page=23

===2024-03-01===

Message field is being moved from task attributes to separate field. Message from attributes will be removed on 2024-03-01.

===2023-10-19===

Datetime format inside device export files was unified to yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss.

===2023-09-07===

Separate endpoint for bulk tasks cancellation was added. Endpoint: /tasks/bulkCancel.

===2023-08-16===

Separate endpoint for retry failed tasks in a task group was added. Endpoint: /batches/{batchId}/retryFailedTasks.

===2023-06-30===

Removed company statistics from GET /companies/<ID> response:

* `device_count`
* `user_count`
* `file_count`
* `group_count`
* `task_count`
* `company_count`

This data can still be accessed via dedicated endpoint GET /companies/stats?company_id=<ID>

===2023-04-05===

Removed device properties:
* `status_id`
* `status_name`

These properties are replaced by `activity_status` and `task_queue` that were introduced on 2022-12-20.

===2022-12-20===

Added new device properties:
* `activity_status`
* `task_queue`

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Account_Settings'''Account Settings'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Company_levels '''FOTA Company levels''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

File:API tokens3.png

2026-01-14T14:14:05Z

Andrius.Grajevskis:

API tokens3

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T12:12:13Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Create Task */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T12:10:58Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Create Task */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T12:10:15Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Device details View */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T12:09:34Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Table View */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.
 

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown.

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T10:24:09Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Device transfer */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.
 

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown. 

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T10:22:58Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Unlock FT/FMx device */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.
 

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown. 

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T10:22:01Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Move */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.
 

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown. 

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T10:21:18Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Scheduled tasks */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.
 

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown. 

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T10:20:38Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Device details View */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.
 

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown. 

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T10:20:04Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Device details View */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

 

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown. 

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T10:19:04Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Device transfer */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

 

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown. 

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T10:18:21Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Device transfer */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

 

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown. 

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

FOTA WEB Devices

2026-01-13T10:16:36Z

Andrius.Grajevskis: /* Export */

__TOC__
The Device Area is the main area where we can see the devices and all information about them including pending,completed and canceled tasks.

=='''Device Area'''==

There are the following columns in the general Device area.

[[Image:FOTANEWDEVICE1.png|1100px|center]]
{| style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''VALUE'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| rowspan="2" style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" | '''DESCRIPTION'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device description |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Will display device description added by the user. 
|-
|+
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''MODEL'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device model 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Displays device’s model, e.g. FMB001, FMC130 etc. This field cannot be changed.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''FIRMWARE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Device firmware version |default: -</nowiki>
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Once device is seen – field shall display current firmware version. This field is changed only when firmware has been updated and FM device reconnected to FOTA WEB with the new firmware.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CONFIGURATION''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Current configuration name | default: - </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays configuration file name that has been uploaded via FOTA WEB from '''FILES''' tab. If FM configuration was changed via other means than FOTA WEB – this field shall not be updated. 
'''Note:''' if a configuration was downloaded from the device – it’s name shall be displayed.

'''Note:''' From 2022-02-01, if the device was sent from manufacturing with custom client configuration, the name of the configuration will have the following structure '''''GCFXXX_YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' where:

* '''''XXX''''' - shows the internal manufacturing identification number
* '''''YYYYMMDDHHMM''''' - date and time configuration file was uploaded to manufacturing.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMEI''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s IMEI 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s IMEI. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Status''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' '''Offline''' '''Online''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Inactive''' - not activated or already decomissioned '''Offline''' - seen at is more than 24h ago '''Online''' - seen at is less than 24h ago 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Task queue''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' '''Pending''' '''Executing'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Empty''' - no task in a queue '''Pending''' - created task is awaiting execution '''Executing''' - created task is being executed 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SERIAL NO.''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s S/N 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Field displays device’s Serial number. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GSM NUMBER'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |GSM number (MSISDN) of the SIM card installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The GSM number is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the GSM number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''ICCID'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |ICCID of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the ICCID number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''IMSI'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |IMSI number of the SIM card that is installed in the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Note:''' The SIM card IMSI is shown in FOTA WEB for all devices that had the SIM card is installed during the device manufacturing process (eSIM or regular SIM) after May 3rd, 2022.
Previously manufactured devices might not have the IMSI number available in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''PRODUCT CODE'''
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Manufacturing code of the device
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Internal manufacturing code, that shows the device hardware/firmware configuration.

'''Note:''' All devices manufactured '''after''' 2022, May 3rd will have the product code displayed in FOTA WEB - devices manufactured before this date, might not have the product code in FOTA WEB.
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''COMPANY''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Company 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shall always show which company device belongs to directly. Higher level companies shall not be displayed in this field. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''GROUP''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Device’s Group 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |If device is assigned to a group, this field displays group name device is assigned to. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''UPDATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device information has changed. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''SEEN AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the last time device connected to FOTA WEB web. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''CREATED AT''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |String; default: N/A 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This field shows the time device was added to the FOTA WEB web system.
|}

=='''Device Information'''==

=='''Device details View'''==

[[File:Details view3.png|800px|right]]By clicking on a device we can see the displayed information about the selected device.

 

=='''View Tasks'''==

This menu provides an opportunity to observe the status of a TASK. 

Tasks are successfully '''queued job''', meaning that there was no error parsing user’s request to make an [[FOTA WEB Devices#Create task|'''Create Task''']]. 

If there are multiple jobs assigned for a single device – FOTA WEB shall execute them one by one. Each time a job is completed FM shall reconnect to FOTA WEB immediately and if another job is awaiting – attempt to complete it. 

The order of job execution is as follows: 

1. Upload FW to the device 
2. Upload CFG to the device 
3. Download LOGS from the device 
4. Download CFG from the device 

Meaning, that if you set all 4 jobs – the device will first upload firmware file, then configuration file and only on 3rd reconnect to FOTA WEB the logs shall be taken. 

Relevant possible error’s that you may encounter after creating a task 

{| class="wikitable" style="width: 100%;"
|+
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''TASK'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ERROR'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Config assignment''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file mismatch device's platform. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Configuration file is not applicable to this type of device model. Select config file that works on this particular device, e.g. FMB64 config for FMB64 device model. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Firmware file does not exist or information about firmware is missing. Please re-upload firmware file. 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |Re-upload the firmware and try again. Should error remain – contact us (your Sales representative) for assistance. 
|}

In an unlikely event, any other type of error would appear – it should be reported back to us. 

=='''View Changes'''==
[[File:Task changes1.png|thumb|800x800px|Device changes tab]]
This menu provides an opportunity to observe the changes made to device within the company.

You can view the time when a change was made, who made it, and what the change involved.

For example:

* You can see which firmware version, configuration file or CAN/OBD settings was updated, and what it was updated to.
* Group or company changes are also displayed here.

If there is no information available about the device current value, then only the updated value will be shown.

=='''Table View'''==

This function allows you to manage the amount and what kind of information will be displayed in the table. 

Table view has two options: 
1. Select columns to show. 
2. Rows count per page. 

===='''Columns view'''====

This function allows you to filter out what kind of information to be shown about the device. 

===='''Rows per page'''====

This function defines the amount of rows that will be shown. 

=='''Device Task'''==

=='''Create Task'''==

[[Image:FOTATaskCreate.png|500px|right]]The '''Create Task''' pop up menu button is the main tool for all possible actions (tasks) with devices. Successful action results in a [[FOTA WEB Devices#View Tasks|'''queued job''']].

 This chapter provides an explanation of what each dropdown menu item does and how to use it.
There are 3 ways to select the devices for the task: 
1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 
2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 
3. For the devices '''from .csv file'''. 
After selecting the devices, choose the desired task type from the drop-down menu, then click the ‘Next’ button.
[[Image:Create task4.png|400px|alt=|right]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task compatibiity FOTA3.png|400px|alt=|right]]

In compatibility modal will be shown devices that support selected task. Task compatibility is determined based on the device model.

If any devices are not compatible with the chosen task, the compatibility modal will show this message:

Some of the selected device models are not compatible with the selected task type. This task type will not be created by default for incompatible device models.

If needed, you can choose to create a task for these incompatible devices.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [[Image:Task creation notification mesaage.png|alt=|right]]A notification message will be shown after the task is created.
 

=='''Cancel Task'''==

[[Image:Cancel task.png|alt=|right]]By selecting the required device and opening the detailed information you can also cancel the task. Only tasks in the statuses "Pending" and "Running" can be cancelled

 

=='''Task Retry'''==

Single tasks with the status "Failed" or "Completed with errors" can be manually retried by clicking the "Retry" button.

The retried task’s status will change to "Pending".

A task can be retried only by users with the "Task.Retry" permission.
[[Image:Task retry2.png|alt=|right]]

 

=='''Task Types'''==

General information about tasks and task types.

{| class="sortable" style="width: 100%;"
! style="width: 20%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''FIELD NAME'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''ACTION'''
! style="width: 40%; border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #0054A6; background: white; color: #0054A6; text-align: left;" |'''DESCRIPTION'''
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update firmware''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected firmware version | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required firmware version over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be assigned by selecting required firmware version. 
If there is no available firmware versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Update configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Update selected configuration | Select File | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |You can Upload the required configuration over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up windown while selecting the task, if you have the firmware uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required configuration file. 
If there is no available configuration versions for the update, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the file on the same pop up window. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive configuration''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive configuration | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download configuration job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
|-
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |'''Receive internal log''' 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |<nowiki>Receive internal log | Create </nowiki> 
| style="border: 1px solid white; border-bottom: 2px solid #E8E8E8; text-align: left; vertical-align: center; background: white;" |This function assigns a Download logs job to device. Next time it connects to FOTA WEB – selected files shall be downloaded. 
'''NOTE:''' Continuous log lets you select number of files to be downloaded. Newest log files, that are stored in device’s memory, are taken first. 
|-
|'''Send TLS file'''
|<nowiki>Transfer user TLS certificate | Select File | Create </nowiki>
|You can Upload the required TLS certificate over the '''Files menu''' or over the same pop up window while selecting the task, if you have the TLS certificate uploaded already, task can be created by selecting required TLS certificate. If there is no available TLS certificates, please press on '''Upload new file''' button to add the certificate on the same pop up window.
[[File:Alert.png|left|link=]]
 
Task type is only supported by devices with '''Firmware version newer than 03.28.01''', otherwise FOTA WEB will not allow to upload certificate to device and error that feature is not supported will be shown.
|}

=='''Scheduled tasks'''==
[[File:Create task5.png|alt=|right|frameless|600x600px]]
Task'''"Schedule by time"''' feature allows users to select the time, when the created task can be executed.

Time range can be selected in 30 minute periods, but it cannot be less than 2 hours - for example, user can select a task time from 8:30 to 15:00.

With the time range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set hours.

'''NOTES:'''

The time is selected in the user's time zone.

The scheduling feature does '''not''' adjust the time of the device connection to FOTA WEB - the user has to ensure, that the device has the correct connection frequency configured, so the device would connect to FOTA WEB during the set time range. Otherwise, the device will not execute the task.

FOTA WEB connection frequency configuration is described here: [[FMB920 GPRS settings#FOTA%20WEB%20Settings|FOTA WEB Settings]]

[[File:Create task by date5.png|alt=|right|frameless|500x500px]]
 Task '''"Schedule by date"''' feature allows users to select the date interval, when the created task can be executed.

An example: Client need to update the configuration of specified devices during the upcoming weekend (2024.12.21 - 2024.12.22).

There is no minimum day limit, so you can select the same day. The maximum selectable date range is from 1 to 360 days.

With the date range set for the task, the device will only execute the task, if it connects to FOTA WEB during set up days.

Task schedule by date is available from Standard company level.

'''NOTES:'''

If tasks aren't performed on a set date, their status is changed to expired.

Schedule is created by users' local time.
Date picker cannot be further than task expiration time limit (It depends on a company's level).
 

=='''Move'''==

[[Image:FOTAMove.png|right]]
This functionality allows moving devices between companies.
 
[[Image:Device move3.png|500x500px|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 1. For the manually '''selected devices'''. 2. For the '''filtered devices'''. 3. For the devices '''from .csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

Select '''Company''' or '''Group''' name that these devices should be assigned to.

* Each device group has its own ID.
* You can search for a device group using either its name or its ID.

'''NOTE:'''
A '''Group''' must be created first in '''Groups''' menu.
 

=='''Import'''==
[[File:Import_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Import''' device attributes from the supported '''.csv''' file.
There are 4 possible attributes that can be imported using this function. 
1. Description 
2. GSM Number 
3. ICCID 
4. IMSI 
 
'''NOTE:''' File syntax is as follows: IMEI, Attribute value.

=='''Export'''==
[[File:Export_new.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used to '''Export''' selected devices to the required '''.csv''' or '''.xlsx''' files.

An exported file will contain columns that are currently visible in the devices table.
 
[[File:Export device data win2.png|600px|alt=|right]]

There are 3 possible filtering options for this function. 
1. For the '''manually selected devices using the checkbox.''' 
2. For the '''filtered devices using one of available filters.''' 
3. For the '''devices specified in the uploaded file csv file''' (IMEI or Serial No. can be used as identifier). 

'''Note:'''
Export files will be automatically deleted after 7 days. To keep export files for longer than 7 days, please save them on your computer.
 

=='''Device transfer'''==
[[File:Device transfer5.png|right|frameless]]
This function is used by customers to '''transfer devices''' between unrelated companies.
 

'''"Device transfer" function operation principle:'''
{{{insert1|[[Image:FotaDeviceTransfer.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

1. Company A (Device receiving company) generates a transfer token by selecting "Receive devices" tab and clicking on the "Create button". {{{insert2|
[[Image:FotaDeviceToken.png|550x270px|right|frameless]]}}}

The generated token will be visible in the following window.

'''NOTE:'''

The token is single-use and expires in 21 days. Send this token to the person responsible for transferring devices from their company to yours.

2. Company A provides a token to Company B (Device sending company)

[[Image:Device transfer6.png|450x450px|right]]
 
3. Sending company B opens the Device transfer window, Transfer devices tab, and selects the preferred device selection method (Selected, Filtered, or From file).
 
4. Company B enters the transfer token and clicks on the "Transfer" button to transfer selected devices to the "Receiving company" If all steps were correctly done, device/devices will be transferred to the receiving company, and both companies will receive an e-mail regarding the successful device transfer.
 

=='''Search'''==

This function is used to search for a device. 

You can search for devices by using the: 
1. IMEI. 
2. Description. 
3. Serial Number. 

=='''Status'''==

This function is used to search for devices with the specific chosen status. 

You can choose the devices that have this status: 
1. Inactive. 
2. Offline. 
3. Online. 

=='''Filter'''==

[[File:More filters2.png|thumb|Filters options]]

Filter is designed to both: (1) filter out a list of devices based on combinations of parameters, (2) and to make bulk ACTIONS.

You can select/filter devices by:

*Group 
*Device Model 
*Device Platform 
*Firmware version 
*Configuration version 
*Job status 
*Spec ID

Under '''Active Filters''' section, you shall see the current filters that have been selected. 
Each of the '''Active Filters''' can be removed individually by clicking on a particular filter, or they all can be removed together by clicking '''Clear all'''. 
'''Active Filters''' shall maintain the current configuration until manually Reset, meaning that navigating through various FOTA WEB menu’s '''Active Filters''' shall remain as last configured. 

===='''Bulk assignment'''====

Once '''Active Filters''' section has any number of parameters, the '''ACTIONS''' dropdown button automatically displays how many devices have been filtered. It allows to assign jobs to all selected devices. 

Example for the device filtering window is showed below, where FMB120 model selected.
[[Image:FotaFilter.png|1100px|center]]

Clicking on '''Create task''' and then selecting a task from filtering, say Firmware upgrade, would assign a Firmware upgrade job to selected devices.

=='''Unlock FT/FMx device'''==
If your FT/FMx device is locked, follow the steps below to unlock it.[[File:Action window.png|thumb|500x500px|Unlock key generator]]1. Log in to your FOTA WEB account. 
2. Find the locked device and open its details window. 
3. Click on Actions, then select Generate Unlock Key. 
[[File:Select platform.png|thumb|Device platforms selection]]

 

4. If the device platform is unknown, you’ll need to manually select the FT or FMx platform from the pop-up window. For devices with the FT, FMx, or Legacy platforms, an unlock code can be created without needing to choose the platform. 

[[File:Unlock window.png|thumb|FT device unlock key]]
 
5. Copy the unlock key from the TCT or Teltonika Configurator of the locked device.

The unlock keys for FT and FMx devices have different lengths. See the examples below for reference:

 
[[File:FBx device unlock window.png|thumb|FMx device unlock key]] 

[[File:Generate unlock key.png|thumb|Enter lock key ]]
 
6. Enter the Lock Key copied from TCT or Teltonika Configurator to FOTA WEB>>Lock key field. 

 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key2.png|thumb|border|Generated unlock key]]
 
7. Press the Generate button to retrieve the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

[[File:Generate unlock key4.png|thumb|Copy FT unlock code on FOTA WEB]]
 
8. Copy the key from FOTA WEB. 

 

 

[[File:Enter unlock key.png|thumb|FT unlock code on TCT]]

 
9. Paste the copied key into TCT for FT device or into Teltonika Configurator for FMx device and press Unlock button to unlock the unit. 

 
[[File:Enter unlock code to Teltonika Configurator.png|thumb|FMx unlock code on Teltonika Configurator]]
 

'''Notice:'''

All user roles can use the device unlocker.
The user can unlock the same device up to three times. Once the limit is reached, the unlock feature will be disabled for 24 hours. If the user tries to create more keys than allowed, an error will be displayed.

{|style="width:100%;"
|-
|[https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Dashboard '''Dashboard'''] - Previous page
|style="text-align:right;| Next page - [https://wiki.teltonika-gps.com/view/Task_Groups '''Task Groups''']
|}

[[Category:FOTA WEB]]

File:Create smart group4.png

2026-01-09T14:18:44Z

Andrius.Grajevskis:

Create smart group4